2 0 2 4
WRANGLER
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can expose
you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. CALL
1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery
Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s
Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside
Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by
visiting the website on the back cover.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.................................................. 15 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .................................. 119 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ......................................................... 143 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................ 201 5
6 SAFETY ................................................................................. 223 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ............................................................ 268 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE.................................................... 282 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 342 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................. 348 10
11 INDEX ................................................................................... 353
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY .......................8
ROLLOVER WARNING .................. 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ................... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ................15
Battery Conditioning ................ 16
Off-Board Power Panel — If Equipped ...... 16
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) .......19
E-Select Mode ................... 19
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION ....... 20
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet ............. 20
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp) ..... 20
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt, 40 Amp) ..... 27
Charging Times ...................27
Vehicle Charge Indicators ............. 27
Hybrid Electric Pages ................ 28
KEYS ........................... 31
KeyFob .......................31
SENTRY KEY .......................33
IGNITION SWITCH ....................34
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 34
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition — PHEV Only . . . 35
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............ 37
How To Use Remote Start ............. 37
To Exit Remote Start Mod e ............ 37
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .....................38
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . 38
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped .............. 38
Remote Start Cancel Message .......... 38
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (PHEV Only) ....38
How To Use Remote Start .............39
To Enter Remote Star t Mode ........... 39
To Exit Remote Start Mod e Without Driving The
Vehicle ....................... 39
Scheduled Cabin Co ndi tio ning (SCC) ....... 39
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....40
To Arm The System ................40
To Disarm The System ............... 41
Rearming Of The System ............. 41
Security System Manual Override .........41
DOORS ..........................41
Manual Door Lo cks ................ 41
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 42
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry (If Equipped) ............42
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ...... 44
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .....................44
Front Do or Removal ................ 45
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ..... 47
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped ........ 49
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped ....... 50
STEERING WHEEL .................... 56
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........ 56
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 56
SEATS ..........................57
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If Equipped . . 57
Manual Adjustment Front Seat s — If Equipped . . 58
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats .......... 59
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —
Two Door Models .................. 61
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ......... 62
Unfolding The Rear Armrest — PHEV Only .... 62
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........62
Head Restraints .................. 63
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........... 65
Introducing Voice Recognition ...........65
Basic Voice Commands .............. 65
Get Started ..................... 65
Additional Information ............... 65
MIRRORS ........................ 66
Inside Rearview Mirror ............... 66
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ............. 66
Outside Mirrors ................... 66
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped . . 67
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 67
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..........67
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink®) — IF EQUIPPED .............67
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 67
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 68
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 68
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................68
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device ........................ 69
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 69
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..... 69
Security .......................70
Troubleshooting Tips ................70
2
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................70
Headlight Switch .................. 70
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . . 71
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 71
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped ..................... 71
Flash-To-Pass ....................71
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......71
Lights-On Reminder ................ 71
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 72
Turn Signals ..................... 72
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ........ 72
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................... 72
Interior Cour tesy Lights .............. 72
Dimmer Control ..................72
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........ 73
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........73
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . . 74
CLIMATE CONTROLS................... 74
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 74
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................... 76
Climate Voice Commands ............. 77
Operating Tips ................... 77
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 78
Storage ....................... 78
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped ........ 79
USB/AUX Control .................. 79
Power Outlets ...................80
Power Inverter — If Equipped ........... 81
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped .........81
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED .......... 82
Auto-Down Feature ................83
Window Lockout Switch .............. 83
Wind Buffeting ................... 83
WRANGLER TOPS .................... 83
Provided Tools ................... 83
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position . . 84
Raising The Soft Top ................ 93
Removing The Soft Top .............. 96
Installing The Soft Top ............... 97
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal .........99
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation .......103
Removing The Hard Top .............103
Installing The Hard Top ..............105
Sunrider® For Hard Top ............. 105
Power Sliding Top — If Equipped ........107
DOOR FRAME ..................... 110
Door Frame Removal ...............110
Door Frame Installation Four Door Models —
If Equipped .................... 111
Door Frame Installation Two Door Models —
If Equipped .................... 112
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ................ 113
Lowering The Windshield .............113
Raising The Windshie ld ............. 115
HOOD .......................... 115
Opening The Hood ................ 115
Closing The Hood ................. 116
REAR SWING GATE ..................116
Cargo Area Features ...............117
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ....... 117
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................ 119
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......... 121
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PHEV Only ........122
Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
PHEV Only .....................123
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......... 124
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ...................... 124
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ........ 125
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable .....126
Display And Messages ..............127
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items . . 129
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Elect ric al Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped .................... 132
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........133
Red Warning Light s ................133
Yellow Warning Lights .............. 136
Yellow Indicator Lights .............. 139
Green Indicator Lights .............. 139
White Indicator Lights ..............140
Blue Indicator Lights ............... 141
Gray Indicator Lights ...............141
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 141
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ................... 142
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ......................142
3
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................143
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 143
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 143
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine .......143
AutoPark ...................... 144
Extended Park Starting .............. 145
If Engine Fails To Start .............. 145
Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............145
After Starting ................... 145
STARTING THE VEHICLE — PHEV (IF EQUIPPED) . . 146
Normal Starting .................. 146
After Starting ................... 147
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/
STOP Button .................... 147
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 147
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
6.4L ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) .............147
PARKING BRAKE ...................148
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .....149
Shifting ....................... 149
Downshifting ................... 150
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .... 151
Ignition Park Interlock .............. 151
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................151
8–Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 152
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .......... 154
Four-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped . . 155
Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . 156
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ........158
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear —
If Equipped .................... 158
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If Equipped . . 158
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped .................... 159
Off Road+ — If Equipped ............. 160
TORQUE RESERVE — 6.4L (IF EQUIPPED) ..... 160
DUAL MODE EXHAUST — 6.4L (IF EQUIPPED) . . . 161
WINCH USAGE — RUBICON (IF EQUIPPED) .....161
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . 161
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . 161
Winch Accessories ................ 162
Operating Your Winch .............. 162
Rigging Techniques ...............166
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING .....167
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —
6.4L (IF EQUIPPED) .................. 167
STOP/START SYSTEM —
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ....167
AutostopMode ..................168
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ...................... 168
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . 168
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . 169
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 169
System Malfunction ................ 169
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................... 169
AutostopMode .................. 170
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ......................170
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . 170
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . 170
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 171
System Malfunction ................ 171
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 171
Cruise Control ...................171
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .......... 173
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . 179
ParkSense Sensors ................ 179
ParkSense Warning Display ........... 179
ParkSense Display ................180
Enabling And Disa bling ParkSense ....... 181
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ....................... 181
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 182
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..... 182
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........182
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......... 183
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............... 184
Fuel Filler Cap .................. 184
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ......... 185
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — PHEV (IF EQUIPPED) . . 185
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ......... 187
VEHICLE LOADING ................... 187
Certificati on Label ................ 187
TRAILER TOWING ...................188
Common Towing Definitions ...........188
Trailer Hitch Classification ............ 190
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ....... 190
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............ 191
Towing Requirements ..............191
Towing Tips ....................193
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ............... 193
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 193
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models .......................194
DRIVING TIPS......................195
On-Road Driving Tips ............... 195
Off-Road Driving Tips ...............195
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .................201
CYBERSECURITY ................... 201
UCONNECT SETTINGS ................. 201
Customer Programmable Features ....... 201
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ......................217
Radio Operation .................. 217
Media Mode .................... 217
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 217
Regulatory And Safety Information ....... 217
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .......... 217
Vehicle Dynamics .................218
Accessory Gauge .................218
Pitch & Roll .................... 218
TrailCam — If Equipped .............. 218
Trail Recording — If Equipped .......... 219
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED ........220
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES................... 223
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........223
Audible Pedestrian Warning System -
If Equipped .................... 223
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) —
If Equipped .................... 224
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 224
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............ 230
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 230
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............. 234
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 235
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......... 239
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 239
Important Safety Precautions .......... 239
Seat Belt Systems ................240
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .... 245
Child Restraints ................. 255
SAFETY TIPS ...................... 265
Transporting Passengers ............. 265
Transporting Pets ................265
Connected Vehicles ................265
Safety Chec ks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ....................... 266
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ............... 267
Exhaust Gas ....................267
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 267
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........... 268
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..... 268
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........... 270
Preparations For Jacking ............ 271
Jack Location ................... 271
Spare Tire Removal ............... 272
Jacking Instructions ...............272
JUMP STARTING ....................274
Preparations For Jump Start ........... 275
Jump Starting Procedure .............276
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............ 277
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ............... 278
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE..............279
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........... 280
Four–Wheel Drive Models ............ 280
Without The Key Fob ............... 281
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..... 281
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .........................281
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 281
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............... 282
Maintenance Plan ................ 282
SCHEDULED SERVICING — 6.4L ...........285
Maintenance Plan ................ 286
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...............288
2.0L Engine .................... 288
2.0L PHEV Engine ................ 289
3.6L Engine .................... 290
6.4L Engine .................... 291
Checking Oil Level ................ 292
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 292
Maintenance-Free Battery ............292
Pressure Washing ................. 293
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ............... 293
Engine Oil ..................... 293
Engine Oil Filter .................. 294
Engine Air Clea ner Filter .............294
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ......... 296
5
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 297
Body Lubrication ................. 298
Windshield Wiper Blades ............ 298
Exhaust System ................. 300
Cooling System .................. 301
Brake System ................... 303
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..............304
Transfer Case ................... 304
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 305
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....305
Fuses ....................... 305
Bulb Replacement ................ 317
TIRES ..........................320
Tire Safety Information .............320
Tires — Gener al Information ........... 326
Tire Types ..................... 328
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............ 329
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........... 330
Snow Traction Devices ..............331
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 332
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................332
Treadwear ..................... 333
Traction Grades .................. 333
Temperature Grades ...............333
STORING THE VEHICLE ................333
STORING THE VEHICLE — PHEV (IF EQUIPPED) . . 334
BODYWORK.......................335
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ..... 335
Body And Und er body Maintenance .......335
Preserving The Bodywork ............ 335
INTERIORS ....................... 337
Carpet Safety Information ............ 337
CarpetRemoval ................. 337
Seats And Fabric Parts .............. 340
Plastic And Co ated Parts ............. 341
Leather Surfaces ................. 341
Glass Surfaces .................. 341
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ...... 342
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 342
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 342
Torque Specifications ............... 342
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................343
2.0L Engine .................... 343
3.6L Engine .................... 343
6.4L Engine .................... 343
Reformulated Gasoline .............343
Materials Added To Fuel .............343
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .......... 344
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . 344
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .... 344
MMT In Gasoline ................. 344
Fuel System Cautions .............. 344
FLUID CAPACITIES ...................345
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .........346
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 347
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ..................... 348
Prepare For The Appointment ..........348
Prepare A Li st ................... 348
Be Reasonable With Requests ......... 348
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............348
Roadside Assistance ............... 348
FCA US LLC Customer Center .......... 349
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ....... 349
Mexico ....................... 349
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ....... 349
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ........... 350
Service Contract ................. 350
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............350
MOPAR®PARTS ...................350
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............ 350
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .........................350
In Canada ..................... 351
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............351
Change Of Ownership Or Address ..........351
General Information .................. 352
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not i ntended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road
use only. It is not intended for rugged off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you sta rt to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s
Manual. Be sur e you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on
different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or a collision
page 195.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only cons ide r the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped" or, if applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information.
All data conta ine d in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collis io n,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could r esu lt in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion whi ch will improve i nstalla-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product o r functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a highe r center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cu t the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 133.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 133
Brake Warning Light
page 134
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 134
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
page 134
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 134
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 134
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 135
Hood Open Warning Light
page 135
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service Warning Light
page 135
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 135
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 135
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
page 135
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Li ght
page 136
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
page 136
Torque Limited Warning Light
page 136
Red Warning Lights
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault Warning Light
page 139
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 136
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 136
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 137
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
page 137
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
page 137
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 137
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 137
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
page 137
Service 4WD Warning Light
page 137
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
page 137
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 138
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 138
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
page 138
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
page 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 138
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
page 139
4WD Low Indicator Light
page 139
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
page 139
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
page 139
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
page 139
Front A nd Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
page 139
Yellow Indicator Lights
Neutral Indicator Light
page 139
Off Road+ Indicator Light
page 139
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
page 139
Sway Bar Indicator Light
page 139
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
page 139
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
page 139
12
INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights
4WD Auto Indicator Light
page 140
Cruise Control SET Indic ator Light
page 140
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 140
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
page 140
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 140
Plug Status Indica tor Light
page 140
Green Indicator Lights
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 140
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 140
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
page 140
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 140
2WD High Indicator Light
page 141
Hill Descent Co ntrol (HDC) Indicator Light
page 141
INTRODUCTION 13
1
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the rear seat.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
•
Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of recha rgeable batteries of the same size.
•
Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
•
Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely dischar ge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
•
Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis-
charged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service di sconne ct is located
under the access panel, unde r the left side rear seat.
Only a qualified service technician should access the
high voltage battery service disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
•
Never try to remove the high voltage battery ser-
vice disconnect. The high voltage battery service
disconnect is used when your vehicle requires ser-
vice by a qualified technician at an authorized
dealership. Failure to follow this warning can result
in electrical shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other
hazards which can cause death o r serious inju ry
including severe burns, respiratory injuries, and
blindness.
•
The high voltage battery and battery case have no
parts that you or an unqualified technician can
service. Under no circumstances should you or an
unqualified technician open, disassemble, pen-
etrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery, bat-
tery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage to
these components can result in electrical shock,
toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness. You
should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer-
ship for any servic e or maintenance o n these high
voltage components.
•
The high voltage system can be hot during and
after starting, and when the vehicle is shut off or
charging. Be care fu l of both the high voltage and
the high temperature. Failure to do so can result in
severe burns.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last
the life of your vehicle. See an autho ri zed dealer for
information on the disposal of the battery if it should
require replacement.
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high voltage
battery. If the battery is di spose d of improperly, there is
a risk of electrical shock and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respirator y injuries, fire s, and other
hazards resulting in serious injury or death.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Manage-
ment system that is designed to:
•
Ensure safe operation
•
Maximize driving range
•
Maximize the li fe expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking noise
may be heard from within the vehicle. When the vehicle
is preparing to start, the high voltage battery contactors
inside the battery are closed to make the stored elec-
tricity inside available for vehicle use. After the vehicle
is shut down, the contactors open, to electrically isolate
the battery from other vehicle systems. The clicking
noise is the sound of these contactors as they open
and close du ring normal operatio n.
15
2
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
•
If your vehicle is still drivable, pull off to the side of
the road when safe to do so, place the transmis-
sion in the PARK posi ti on, apply the parking brake,
and turn the vehicle off.
•
Beware of any exposed high-voltage parts or
cables. To avoid electrical shock which can result
in serious injury or death, never touch wiring, con-
nectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as the
inverter unit and the Lithium-ion battery.
•
Leaks or dama ge to the L it hiu m-io n battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact e mer gency services immediately.
Since the flui d leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
•
If a fire occurs inside your vehicle, leave the
vehicle as soon as possible. Only use a type ABC,
BC, or C fire extinguisher that is meant for use on
electrical fires. Using a small amount of water, or
the incorrect fire extinguisher can result in serious
injury or death from electrical shock.
•
If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due to
vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave the
vehicle and contact emergency services. Advise first
responders that this is a hybrid-electric vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
BATTERY CONDITIONING
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below at
vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Plug In Vehicle To Condition Battery”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
•
If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery tempera-
tures, the instrument cluster will display the mes-
sage “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery Condi ti on-
ing Needed”.
•
If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery tem-
peratures, the “Plug In Vehicle To Condition Batter y”
will be shown in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
•
When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery Con-
ditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep the
ignition in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the ignition back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
•
Under these high or low temperatures, while the
vehicle is plugged in and the ignition is in the OFF
position, the vehicle may “wake up” to precondition
the high voltage battery for use.
•
It is recomme nde d that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
•
It is recomme nde d that the high voltage battery not
be exposed to direct sunlight in high temperature
environments while the vehicle is OFF. This may
lower the life of the battery.
The messages will only be displayed when the ignition
is in the RUN position and the high voltage battery is
not ready to provide propulsion power. The messages
will also display if there was a failed attempt to achieve
READY state when the high voltage battery cell tem-
peratures were either too cold, or too hot.
OFF-BOARD POWER PANEL —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO
RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK: This publication
contains important instructions and warnings that
should be followed during the use of the Off-Board
Power Panel feature. Before using the Off-Board
Power Panel, make sure to check the equipment for
any leaks or water damage. Failure to follow these
warnings and instructions can result in electrical
shock and fire which can cause death or serious
injury.
(Continued)
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The engine may idle during use to power the out-
lets. A runni ng engine emits exhaust containing
carbon monoxide, which can cause injury or death
if inhaled. Never use in closed or confined spaces.
•
Never use the Off-Board Power Panel, vehicle charg-
ing port, or 3-pin outlet power plug while in use with
wet hands. Always handle the Off-Board Power Panel
with dry hands. Never use or allow the Off-Board
Power Panel to get wet. Do not use it in wet or damp
locations, and d o not submerge it in water. Only use
electrical equipment with a waterproof function/
rating, or use it in a waterproof environment. Do not
use in environments with rain or high humidity.
•
Never insert metal objects into the Off-Board Power
Panel connectors, or in the vehicle charging port, as
this action can damage the connection terminals.
•
Never disassemble the Off-Board Power Panel.
•
Do not overload electrical extension cords.
•
If there is a risk of lightning, do not use the Off-
Board Power Panel system outside the vehicle.
•
When the Off-Board Power Panel is in operation,
the vehicle’s cooling fan can operate automatically
even if the vehicle is turned off. Do not put your
hands near the cooling fan while it is operating.
•
Never use electrical equipment that requires a
continuous power supply, such as medical equip-
ment. The power supply may be interrupted
depending on t he vehicle’s condition.
The Off-Board Power Panel enables the tr ansfer of energy
from the vehicle to the external load (utility tools, electric
toaster, dryer, or camping equipment), which is connected
to a power socket on the Off-Board Power Panel.
NOTE:
•
When the Off-Board Power Panel is plugged in, and
the button is not pushed on the panel, the vehicle
will not receive the needed information for providing
power to the load. The vehicle will alert an “External
issue detected” pop up and fault indications. When
the button on the power panel is pressed, the faults
will be cleared and the power transfer will happen.
•
Once the Off-Board Power Panel is enabled, and the
power transfer does not begin for 60 minutes, the
authentication will time out. Turn on t he vehicle to
re-authenticate use of the Off-Board Power Panel.
•
During the 60 minutes the authent icat io n is valid,
and when power transfer is not in progress, the Off -
Board Power Panel may transition to sleep mode. In
that case, pushi ng the Off-Board Power Panel button
will turn the feature on and loads can be connected
to draw power.
•
The Off-Board Power Panel will be reset to OFF every time
the Off-Board Power Panel assembly is unplugged.
•
When the Off-Board Power Panel assembly is
plugged in, the vehicle will not be able to achieve a
drive ready state.
•
When the Off-Board Power Panel is activated,
re-authenticating the key will be required to achieve a
drive ready state.
The Off-Board Power Panel provides maximum flexibility
in powering off-board loads using t he high voltage sys-
tem under three modes of operation:
1. Hybrid Mode
○
Hybrid Mode o ffers a balance of efficiency and
duration of power availability.
○
Press the Max Regeneration button and once
illuminated Hybrid mode is activated.
○
Defaults to engine-on as the mode is entered (if
not already running). Runs for a minimum of five
seconds then shuts off if required conditions
are met
○
Battery charges till minimum threshold percent-
age is reache d, then the engine shuts off.
Hybrid charging/depletion cycle commences
and the engine runs as necessary and turns
on/off periodically
○
A low-fuel warning is displayed on the instrument
cluster display, and the engine shuts off. The
panel draws power from the batter y until mini-
mum SOC is reached (engine never restarts)
2. Electric Mode
○
Available if the SOC is above the minimum
threshold
○
High voltage battery provides power until
depleted, then the panel deactivates
○
Engine never turns on
3. Generator Mode
○
Engine runs to charge the battery and power the
system (run post-start required)
○
Engine runs, while charging the battery, until a
low fuel-level is reached or the battery SOC is
maxed
○
Low-fuel warning displayed on the instrument
cluster display or the battery SOC is reached.
The engine shuts off and the panel draws power
from the battery until the minimum SOC is
reached if engine never restarts
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
NOTE:
If the off-board power panel is in Hybrid Mode and the
Max Regeneration button is pressed for a se cond time,
the off-board power panel will default to Generator
Mode if the engine is ON and running. The of f-boa rd
power panel will default to Electric Mode if the battery
SOC is above the minimum threshold plus the engine is
off. If the engine is off and the SOC is below the mini-
mum threshold the system will fault and will turn off.
CAUTION!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTONS PERTAINING TO
POWER PANEL USE AND OPERATION:
It is important to
follow these instructions and cautions of the Off-
Board Power Panel’s overall use and operation. Fail-
ure to follow these instructions may result in damage
to the Off-Board Power Panel, vehicle, and/or
appliance.
•
Never leave electrical equipment/appliances con-
nected and operating on the Off-Board Power
Panel unattended.
•
It is recomme nde d to plug e lect ric al equipment/
appliances directly into the Off-Board Power Panel.
•
Never use high power electrical equipment/
appliances such as an air conditioner, washing
machine, or d ryer.
•
This product contains lithium-ion battery and
should be dis posed appropriately to avoid fire and
environmental impact. Do not dispose with regular
household garbage.
The energy to support the loads are provided by the
high voltage battery in the vehicle. The inverter in the
vehicle will convert the direct current (DC) power from
the high voltage battery to alternating current (AC)
power to support the loads.
The Off-Board Power Panel has an internal recharge-
able battery that will start the Off-Board communica-
tions with your electric vehicle. Should the internal bat-
tery be low/discharged, you will need to use an external
USB Type C power source to start up the Off-Board
Power Panel.
NOTE:
Ensure you have a Type C USB power source or external
adapter that can provide 5V/2A to the Type C connector.
Battery Check Mode
In this procedure, the Off-Board Power Panel cannot be
connected to the vehicle:
1. Push the AC ON button on the power panel for one
second and r ele ase to start up the Off-Board Power
Panel internal power. The power indicator will turn
ON then OFF.
2. Push the AC ON button again one time and release.
The ignition i ndi cator will flash one time and con-
tinue to flash three times to indicate there is suffi-
cient power to start the Off-Board Power Panel.
NOTE:
If it does not flash three times, it means the internal
battery is low. Use an external Type C, or use a Type
C USB power source to charge the internal battery.
Normal Operation Mode
NOTE:
The vehicle has to be on in order to enable this feature.
1. Connect the Of f -Boa rd Power Panel electric plug to
your electric vehicle.
2. Push the AC ON button one time and release. The
Off-Board Power Panel power indicator will turn ON
then OFF, and the vehicle indicator light will flash.
3. Engage your vehicle’s V2L function to provide AC
power to the Off-Board Power Panel. Once enabled,
this will permi t the use of the Off-Board Power Panel
to be used with your vehicle.
4. The Off-Board Power Panel is ready to provide AC
power to the AC outlets.
NOTE:
Ensure your electrical equipment/appliance’s power
switch is in the OFF position before inserting the plug
into the power outlet of the Off-Board Power Panel.
CAUTION!
Power of f and disconnect and Off-Board Power Panel
if any electrical equipment/appliance has a strange
odor, or begins to smoke while they are powered ON
or operating.
5. To disable the AC power to the AC outlets, push the
AC ON button one time and rele ase . The AC power to
the outlets will be disco nnec ted.
NOTE:
The vehicle will turn off the V2L function and stop
providing power to the Off-Board Power Panel power.
Resetting The Off-Board Power Panel
1. If the ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is trig-
gered, it wi ll shut off AC power into latch mode and
the power LED will flash for 20 se cond s.
2. To reset the V 2L, unplug the EV coupler for 10 sec-
onds and plug it in again.
3. Push the AC ON button for the control pilot signal to
communicate with the vehicle to restart and Off-
Board Power Panel power on process.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REGENERATIVE BRAKING SYSTEM
(RBS)
Your vehicle has a RBS. The RBS replenishes the vehi-
cle's high voltage battery during deceleration, and is
particularly useful in stop-and-go city t raffic. The elec-
tric motors, which propel the vehicle forward, can oper-
ate as generators when braking. The RBS recharges t he
high voltage battery under certain braking conditions by
recapturing energy that would otherwise be lo st while
braking. The electr ic power that is generated goes back
into the high voltage battery for later use, for example
when acceleration is desired.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions whi le
braking, ONLY frictio n is used to slow the vehicle. The
RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service
brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled mainte-
nance, and service intervals for the vehicle s ervice
brakes must be followed.
Max Regeneration
Max Regeneration is a supplemental feature of the
RBS. When activated, it will use the RBS to help slow
the vehicle when the driver releases the accelerator
pedal. This feature allows you to moderately reduce
driving speed without pressing the brake pedal. It is
always necessary to apply the brake pedal to bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
This feature can be activated by pressing the Max
Regeneration button, below the radio screen.
NOTE:
The Max Regeneration feature will remain on once
selected, even after the vehicle is restarted.
E-SELECT MODE
This system allows the driver to select different modes
by pushing the following buttons located below the
headlight switch.
•
Hybrid: Depletes electric range first, then gas ra nge.
○ Automatically swi tche s between using gas and
battery for greatest efficiency and performance.
○ Best HVAC and acceleration performance.
○ Default Mode.
•
Electric: Prevents the engine from running, unless
you absolutely need it.
○ Acceleration and heating performance may be
degraded.
○ Engine will switch on during a Wide Open Throttle
(WOT) event, or if cruise control requires it.
○ Vehicle will automatically switch to Hybrid mode
upon reaching 0% State Of Charge (SOC) or due
to system needs.
○ Not allowed with manual gate operation unless in
4WD Low and Selec-Speed Control (SSC) is
active.
•
e-Save: Engine only. Saves the current SOC/Electric
range for later.
○ SOC/Electric range may increase, but will not
decrease under most driving conditions. Under
heavy load, such as while pulling a trailer, SOC
may decrease.
○ Engine may turn o ff at a stop.
○ You can further customize the e-Save operation
in the radi o,
page 201.
Max Regeneration Button
E-Select Mode Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 CHARGING INLET
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE
J1772 charge inlet (vehicle char ge inlet) for both AC
Level 1 (120 V) and AC Level 2 (240 V) charging.
Open the charge port door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the char ge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer e dge near the center.
AC LEVEL 1 CHARGING
(120 VOLT, 12 AMP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). AC
Level 1 charging requires a conventional NEMA 5-15R
120 Volt AC grounded wall outlet along with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) provided with the vehicle.
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow the warnings below. Failure
to do so may result in serious injury or death
•
Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet be come s
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
in building str uct ur es that use fuse-based circuit
protection. Use only with electrical circuits pro-
tected by circuit breakers.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
•
When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
•
Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
•
Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
immediately if charging stops before it’s completed
when the plug or cord is moved or adjusted.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the plug has a loose connection with the wall out-
let or i f the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
•
If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
•
Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) has bee n damaged
in any manner. It is recommended that you contact
an authorized dealership.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle
Warranty.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Electrical shock, f ir e, and other
serious hazards can occur if the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not used properly. This vehicle uses
a high voltage current. Failure to follow the proper
charging instructions in this publication can ca use
serious injury or death. There are no serviceable
parts in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not
open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with the
(Continued)
Vehicle Charge Inlet Location
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to follow
this warning can result in electrical shock, fire, prop-
erty damage, and death or serious injury.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is stored in the
rear cargo a rea below the load floor. To access this
area, lift up the cargo strap of the load flo or cover, and
remove the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the
storage bag in the bin be low.
Moving, Transporting, And Storage Instructions
After use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage bag and put back in the cargo
storage area. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
will be left outside the vehicle, be sure to protect the
device’s connection end from moisture, dirt, and debris
accumulation and contamination.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
WARNING!
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO
A RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK: This publica-
tion contains important instructions and warnings
that should be followed during charging operations.
Failure to follow these warnings and instructions can
result in e lectr ica l shock and fire which can cause
death or se ri ou s injury.
•
Read this entire publication before using the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE).
•
Do not put fingers or objects into the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) connector.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the flexible power cord is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation, or any other signs of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the enclosure or the co nnector is broken, cracked,
open, or shows any other indication of damage.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may attempt
to reset and run after a power interruption.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt to
repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) yourself – personal injury may result.
•
When using a charging station with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) attached, ensure the
charging station’s cable is not visibly damaged
before plugging into the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult super visi o n is man-
datory when children are in proximity to the charge
station that is in use.
•
Do not use a charge station or vehicle charge inlet
that is worn or damaged with the AC Level 2 charg-
ing cable. Plugging into worn or damaged recep-
tacles may cause damage to the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle.
•
Ensure that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose the
EVSE J1772 vehicle connector to rain or wet condi-
tions. Avoid allowing water or other liquids to pour
or drip onto the vehicle connection end of the
J1772 EVSE connector. If water penetrates the
electrical device, the risk of electrical shock
increases. Ensure that all plugs and cables are
free of mo ist ure before using the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE).
•
In a collisio n, a loose Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly
around in a sudd en stop and s tri ke someone in the
vehicle. Do not store t he Por table Charging Cordset
(EVSE) on the cargo load floor, or in the passenger
compartment.
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
tested for use in temperatures ranging from -40°F
to 122°F (-40°C to 50°C).
•
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
stored at temperatures between -40°F and 176°F
(-40°C and 80°C).
•
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Load Floor Cover
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is compliant with
SAE J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted
with standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) includes:
•
A Charge Connector
•
A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with sta tus indicator display
•
An AC Power Cord with a NEMA 5–15P right angle
plug
•
An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV-rated
•
A Status Indica tor Display
Grounding Instructions
For A Grounded, Cord-Connected Product:
The Por t able Charging Cordset (EVSE) must be grounded.
If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides
a path of least resistance for an electric current to reduce
the risk of electric shock. The Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is equipped with a cord having an equipment-
grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must
be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly
installed and grounded in accordance with all local code s
and ordinances.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on electrical circuits with two-prong
outlets; use with improper outlets could result in elec-
tric shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury. Check with a qualified electrician if you are
in doubt a s to whether the wall outlet is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug prongs provided
with the Portable Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does
not fit the outlet, you must have a proper outlet
installed by a qualified electrician.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
Installation And Operating Instructions
1. Always insert the AC plug prongs of the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a 15 A, or 20 A,
120 VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall outlet first. Do not
use an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a
worn outlet. The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
will not operate safely unless it is plugged directly
into the wall outlet.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
plugged into a dedicated circuit, not a circuit shared
with other devices drawing electricity on the circuit.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on electrical circuits with two-prong
outlets; use with improper outlets could result in elec-
tric shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury. Check with a qualified electrician if you are
in doubt a s to whether the wall outlet is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug prongs provided
with the Portable Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does
not fit the outlet, you must have a proper outlet
installed by a qualified electrician.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
1 — Charge Connector
2 — Charge Cable
3 — AC Plug
4 — EVSE Enclosure
5 — Status Indicator Display
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Check to see if the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is ready to charge by reviewing the indicator
lights.
3. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is ready to
charge, ensure the vehicle is in PARK, and then con-
nect the char ge connector to the vehicle’s charge
inlet. You will hear a “click” when the charge con-
nector is inserted correctly a nd coupled with the
vehicle’s charge inlet.
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the green
indicator light will turn on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should star t charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
○
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) — The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) status indicator lights
illuminate green, red, or yellow to identify the
charging status
page 24.
○
Wall Outlet — Check whether the wall outlet is
functional (no power outage) and/or plug the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a different
wall outlet.
○
Charging Schedule — Check whether the charg-
ing schedules have been enabled. If enabled,
check that you are within the scheduled time
and day of the week. If a charging schedule has
been enabled i n the vehicle, and it is outside the
time and day of the week, you may override the
schedule for this charging event by plugging in
the charge conne ctor, unplugging it, and then
plugging it back into the vehicle charge inlet.
Complete t he double plug sequence within
10 seconds for it to override the set schedule.
○
Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disable d while the hood is open, and
will resume whe n the hood closes.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the Por-
table Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle first,
and then from the wall outlet. To disengage the
vehicle coupler, push the but ton on the connector.
6. Close the inlet door when a Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) is not connected to the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion while co ndu cti ng Level 1 charging. This minimizes
any additional vehicle loads the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) has to support. The additional electrical
loads will extend the high voltage battery charging time.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator L ight
3 — Check Outlet Indicator Light
Inserting The Charge Connector Into The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
Removing The Charge Connector From The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Troubleshooting Using The Status
Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The Green LED signals correct operation of the system.
The Red LED signals a failure in the charging system.
The Yellow LED signals a failure with the outlet.
Any faults in charging are displayed by the LEDs, either
steady or flashing, located on the status indicator dis-
play of the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Refer to
the following troubleshooting table.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
OFF OFF OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) not connected to the
domestic charging outlet or power failure in the domestic
power supply mains.
ON OFF OFF
There are no faults in the domestic power supply mains, so
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) can be connected to
the charge i nlet on the vehicle.
ON ON (Flashing) ON
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic power
supply mains.
When the normal temperature is reached, the system will
make a new charge attempt at a lower current level.
ON OFF ON (Flashing)
Charging to a lower cur rent level due to overheating of the
charging outlet of the do mest ic power supply mains.
LED Indicator Lights
1 — Green LED
2 — Red LED
3 — Yellow LED
24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON O N (Flashing)
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domestic power
supply mains.
Carefully disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from both the vehicle and power outlet and wait for the plug
and outlet to return to normal temperatures. Then, recon-
nect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) to the power out-
let and vehicle and charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the domes-
tic power supply mains.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of the domes-
tic power supply mains.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON (Flashing) OFF OFF Domestic mains power incorrec tly supplied.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it,
then try to charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF
Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault trip over one sec-
ond after relay closure. Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) retry-
ing to charge the vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON OF F
Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault, Retry
Exhausted or Retry is disallowed if trips within one second
of relay closure.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an autho ri zed dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON OFF Dispersion of the electricity on the vehicle.
Disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the
vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge
again.
Contact an autho ri zed dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON (7 Blinks) OFF Electric charging current too high.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and the outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an autho ri zed dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) OFF Charging abnormality on the vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 sec-
onds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) from the vehicle and the domestic power outlet
and reconnect it, then try to charge again.
Contact an autho ri zed dealership in case of a new anomaly.
ON ON (3 Blinks) OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) failure.
ON ON (4 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (5 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (6 Blinks) OFF
Guidelines for preventing fire and e lect ric shock:
•
Ensure the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is posi-
tioned so it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
•
There are no user serviceable parts inside.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if it
is visibly damaged . Contact an authorized dealer-
ship for service.
•
Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
•
Do not allow children to operate the Portable Charg-
ing Cordset (EVSE). Adult super visi on is mandatory
when children ar e in proximity when the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) is in use.
•
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
•
Do not unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from the wall outlet during a charging operation.
NOTE:
During normal o perat io n, the charge connector or AC
plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during charg-
ing, unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) and
have a qualified electrician inspect the wall outlet
before you continue charging
page 352.
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK:
Do not use the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) with an outlet that is worn or dam-
aged. Failure to follow this warning can result in elec-
trical shock, fire, property damage, and death or seri-
ous injury.
Charging Inlet Warning Label
1 — Dangerous Situati on
2 — Risk Of Electric Shock
3 — Reference Owner’s Information
4 — Charging Timer Set
5 — Charging Procedure In Progress
6 — Charging Procedure Complete
7 — Fault In Charging Procedure
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AC LEVEL 2 CHARGING
(240 VOLT, 40 AMP)
AC Level 2 (240 Volt) charging requires a 240 Volt,
Level 2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charg-
ing station. A 40 Amp Level 2 EVSE for home installa-
tion is re comme nde d.
When using public charging stations, ensure the charging
station is re ady to provide charge and t he vehicle is i n
PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged into the vehicle’s
charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the charge con-
nector is inserted correctly and is coupled with the vehi-
cle’s charge inlet .
NOTE:
The vehicle should star t charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
•
Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
•
Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is e nabled and if so, whether the vehicle is
currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging sche du le is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it for this
charging event by plugging in the charge conne ctor,
unplugging it, and then plugging it back into the
vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double plug
sequence within 10 seconds for it to override the set
schedule.
•
Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open. Charg-
ing is disabled while the hood is open, and will
resume when t he hood closes.
To stop the charging process:
•
Press the “STOP” button located on the front of the
EVSE station.
•
Press the but ton located on the Level 2 EVSE
vehicle connector.
•
Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
•
Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord o nto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
CHARGING TIMES
The following factors determine the time i t takes to
charge the high voltage battery:
•
The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
•
The type of Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE) used (Level1–120VorLevel2–240V)
•
Ambient temperature
•
Whether the vehicle’s ignition is in the RUN position
during charging
NOTE:
•
The following charging times ar e estimates based
on charging a high voltage ba ttery that has a <1%
State Of Charge (SOC) value displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
•
Charging times will var y based on the age, condi-
tion, SOC, available current being provided to the
charger from its e nergy source, and temperature of
the high voltage battery.
•
Charging times may be longer if a thermal self-
protection reduces the charging current from the
EVSE being use d.
•
If the vehicle’s ignition is in either the ACC or RUN
position, the vehicle charge indicator may not indi-
cate greater than a 99% SOC and will continue to
charge the vehicle, due to the vehicle loads.
Type of EVSE Estimated Charge Time
Level 1
(120 V/15 A)
Approximately 12 hours
Level 2
(240 V/30 A or 32 A)
Approximately 2 hours
VEHICLE CHARGE INDICATORS
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Display
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster. The battery display will indicate the
current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage bat-
tery; with the percentage value located to the right of
the symbol. When plugged in, the battery symbol also
indicates the battery level along with messages about
the charge or whether the system is waiting to charge
due to the charge schedule. These will appear unless
there is a charging fault. A green plug telltale will be
shown in the cluster, as well as applicable messaging
when charging.
High Voltage Battery Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display in the instrument clus-
ter, your vehicle is equipped with a visual SOC indicator.
The SOC indicator is made up of four lights that are
mounted to the top center of the instrument panel,
which will illumina te whe n the vehicle is plugged into
the charging system.
The SOC indicator provides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
•
The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outs ide of its charging schedule time/day
of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to
begin charging.
•
In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on
the SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status
is available in the instrument cluster display. In the
event of an error in the charging process, the outer
two lights will blink.
•
When the hood is open, the lights on the SOC indi-
cator will not be illuminated.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery
Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 25%
1st light on, 2nd light
blinks
26 – 50%
1st and 2nd lights on,
3rd light blinks
51 – 75%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd lights
on, 4th light blinks
76 – 99%
All four lights on 100%
Two outer lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process
Lights turn o n one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is waiting
for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging
All lights turn on, then
immediately turn off
Indicates a successful
plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated i ndi cati ng the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates are
used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off indi-
cates that the fi rst half is charging. The blink rate will
increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 se cond off to indicate
that the seco nd half is charging. When the battery is
fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights remain
illuminated as charging continues.
Next to the charging inlet, there is an LED that cha nges
color based o n charging status.
LED Charging Inlet
LED Light Color Status
Blue
Indicates that the system is wait-
ing for a scheduled recharge.
Flashing Green Char ging process in place.
Solid Green
Indicates the vehicle is fully
charged.
Blinking Red
Indicates a fault in the charging
system.
HYBRID ELECTRIC PAGES
Within your Uconnect system is the Hybrid Electric App
that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow, under-
stand your driving history, and set a charging schedule
for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To access this
app, press the Apps button o n the main menu bar of
the radio’s touchscreen, and locate the Hybrid Electric
App. Pressing the app icon brings you to a set of hybrid
electric pages: Power Flow, Driving History, Charging
Schedule, e-Save, and Charge Settings (if equipped).
State Of Charge Indicator
Charging Inlet LED Location
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Flow
The Power Flow screen shows the current power read-
ings for all of the following:
•
Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is gener ati ng. Based on vehicle operating
conditions, this power is used to: propel the vehicle,
provide passenger compartment heating, power
vehicle electrical loads, and charge the high voltage
battery. Engine operation is controlled to maximize
fuel economy.
•
Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/
absorbing. A negati ve kW indicates the vehicle’s
high voltage battery is charging.
•
Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the cur-
rent interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Driving History
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in both Full Electric and Hybrid (battery and engine pow-
ered) modes for both the previous week and the current
week. The data is displayed in a bar graph: Electric
mode in teal and Hybrid mod e in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day in
Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below
miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the
week exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values
for miles (km) driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will
be listed above the bar graph in respective colors (teal
for Electric and blue for Hybrid).
Charging Schedule
To set a charging schedule, select the Hybrid Electric
App on the touchscreen and follow these steps:
1. Select “Schedules”.
2. Select one of the three charging schedules by press-
ing the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
screen.
3. Select if Scheduled Charging should “Charge Until
Full”.
4. Set the Charge Start Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
NOTE:
This is to occur every week (as long as the vehicle is
connected to a Charging Cable).
Apps Menu Screen Power Flow Screen
Driving History Screen
Charging Schedules Screen
Set Charge Schedule
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
5. When done, press the back arrow. The active sched-
ule will be indicated by the check mark to the right
of the sched ule event line. The E vent Action and
Time will be displayed.
6. To ad d another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of two independent Scheduled Charging
events can be scheduled at a given time.
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, the vehicle must be
plugged in within five minutes of the start time. The
following are situations in which “Charge Until Full” may
not be honored:
•
If selected for five days (Monday through Friday),
and the vehicle is plugged i n five or mo re minutes
after the start time on any of those days, “Charge
Until Full” will not be honored for that day. “Charge
Until Full” will resume on the next day at the sched-
uled time.
•
If there are multiple plug/unplug events after first
being plugged in within five minutes, “Charge Until
Full” will not be honored for that day.
•
If other schedules (Charge Interval, etc.) are set at a
later time in addition to “Charge Until Full” being
selected, and the vehicle is plugged in five or more
minutes after the scheduled start time, “Charge
Until Full” will not be honored for that day. The next
available schedule will be followed.
NOTE:
•
If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It i s not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
•
If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconne ct system (and Charge
Until Full is not selected), the vehicle’s battery will
not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the vehicle is plugged in within the t ime and day of
the week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging
will automatically begin when the selected charge
time/day of the week o ccu rs or whenever the
vehicle is plugged in with no charge sche du le set.
•
Scheduled Charging may be bypassed and charging
will begin automatically if the high voltage batter y
State Of Charge (SOC) is below its optimal ope rati ng
point.
•
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks the
driver if they would like to “Charge Now?” and pro-
vides other information, including the next charging
schedule start time and estimated time to charge
the battery to 100%. If within one hour of selecting
“Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a powered Charg-
ing Cable, the vehicle will i mmed iately begin to
charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge sched-
ule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule, refer to
the “Schedules” feature within the Hybrid Electric
App.
•
The charging schedule can also be overridden if the
Charging Cable is plugged in, unplugged, and then
plugged in a second time to the vehicle. After the
first plug in ofthe vehicle, wait until the battery
charge indicator on the instrument panel lights up
before unplugging. This “double plug sequence” will
override the schedule that is set in the radio, and
begin charging the vehicle immediately. The double
plug sequence must be completed within 10 sec-
onds for it to override the programmed schedule.
•
If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged , you can select the “Charge Now”
option or u se the double plug override option.
There is also a Climate Schedu le which can be set and
managed for climate or cabin conditioning.
SCHEDULE BYPASS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging win-
dow, a radio pop-up message wi ll be displayed. The
pop-up message asks the driver if they would like to
“Charge Now?” and provides the next charging sched-
ule start time and estimated time to charge the battery
to 100%. If within one hour of selecting “ Yes”, the
vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE, the vehicle will
immediately begin to charge (temporarily ignoring any
set charge sche du le). To fully deactivate the charge
schedule, select the “Enable Sched ule ” checkbox until
the check mar k is removed from the box.
The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in a
second time to the vehicle. This double plug sequence
will override the set schedule in the Hybrid Electric
Pages App, and begin charging the vehicle immed iately.
The double plug sequence must be completed within
10 seconds for it to override the programmed schedule.
30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
e-Save
The fourth screen within the Hybrid Electric Pages App
is the e-Save screen. From this screen, you can specify
the behavior of the e-Save dri ve mode:
•
Battery Save - Maintains the high voltage State of
Charge at its current level under most driving
scenarios.
NOTE:
The SOC may increase if there is sufficient energy
capture through regenerative braking.
•
Battery Charge - Uses additional power from the gas
engine to increase the high voltage State of Charge,
up to 95% capaci ty.
NOTE:
For information on jump starting your vehicle,
page 274.
Charge Settings — If Equipped
The fifth screen within the Hybrid Electric App is the
Charge Setting scr ee n. From this screen, you can select
the rate at which your vehicle charges. Rate selections
1 (low rate of charge) through 5 (high rate of charge)
are available. The lower the selected rate, the longer it
will take for your vehicle to reach a full charge.
The Charge Setting can be adjusted by pressing the “+”
or “-” buttons, and the estimated time until full charge
will update on t he right side of the screen to re flect the
selected Charge Setting.
NOTE:
•
The Charge Setting will be saved each time the
vehicle is turned off, then back on again.
•
For information on jump starting your vehicle,
[[REFER: JUMP_START]].
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors a nd swing gate from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains a mechanical flip key.
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wirele ss signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
With the igniti on on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release But ton only with the
key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes
and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may
be damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong elec-
trical shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency
of the elec tronic d evices insi de of the key fob, avoid
exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
e-Save Screen
Key Fob
1 — Mechanical Key Release But ton
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
NOTE:
•
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery condition
may be indicated by a message in the instrument
cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key
fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
•
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harm-
ful to the environment. Please see an authorized
dealer for proper battery disposal
page 352.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing
Gate
Push and relea se the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all the
doors and swing gate. To lock all the doors, push the
lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will
flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through the Uconnect Set-
tings
page 201.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. A n exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated i n situations wher e
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic but-
ton on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated,
the turn si gnals will flash, the horn may pulse on and
off (if equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a sec-
ond time o r drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn o ff if you place the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn
(if equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
•
You may need to be closer than 66 ft (20 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic feature due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed ci rcuit board.
•
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indi-
cated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the
fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button press.
1.
Remove the back c over of the fob by inserting a flat-
blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of the
fob. Pry until the cover unsnaps being careful not to
damage the seal. Proceed counterclockwise to pr y the
remaining snaps unti l the battery cover can be
removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot
and sliding the battery forward and up being careful
not to damage the electronic board underneath.
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure
the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery
until it i s seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is prop-
erly aligned before snapping it back in place.
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there i s a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Keep new and used batteries away from childre n.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF positi on when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Key fob with mechanical flip key must be ordered to
the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button igni ti on
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indi cates that there i s a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the li ght begins to fla sh after the
bulb check, it indicates that some one attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. If a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off
after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an aut hor ized dealer.
Battery Replacement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 352.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP i gniti on button has several operating
modes that ar e labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These mod es are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are available.
ACC
•
Engine is not started.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. climate controls,
heated seats, etc.) are available.
RUN
•
Driving position.
•
All electrical devices are available.
START
•
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the START/STOP ignitio n button, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a
backup met hod can be used to o pera te the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the
mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
•
Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
•
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver
etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch.
This button comes as an a ssembly, and is not
removable. This can damage the silicone shield.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3—RUN
Backup Starting Method
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a locatio n accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
For more information on normal starting, see
page 143.
•
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
will display “Ignition Or Accessor y On” in the cluster.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™
IGNITION — PHEV ONLY
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left with t he ignition in the RUN
position (engine not running) with gear selector in PARK
for 30 minutes, it will automatically turn off the vehicle.
If the driver door is opened, then closed while propul-
sion is acti ve and the vehicle is in PARK, the vehicle will
shut down. Notifications have been designed into this
feature to raise awareness of the timed event by show-
ing messages in the instrument cluster display.
The instrument clu ster display will also show the message
“Ready to Drive” accompanied with three audible chimes
while the driver door is opened while t he ignition state is
in READY mode. The interior warnings will occur regard-
less of whether the key fob remains in the vehicle or is
removed. The horn will sound three times, and the turn
signals will flash, if the key fob is removed from the
vehicle while the ignition state is in READY mode.
To restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for
starting your vehicle.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating
modes that a re labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These mod es are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
•
Pushing the START/STOP ignition button may only acti-
vate the Electric Propulsion system and not start the
vehicle’s engine (if running the e ngine is not currently
required by the Hybrid system). READY will show in the
instrument cluster display whenever the vehicle is
operating in Elec tri c mode and the vehicle is
stationary.
•
If the vehicle’s ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the
vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle loads.
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2—ACC
3—RUN
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
The ignition ca n be placed in the following positions:
OFF
•
The vehicle is stopped
•
Some electrical devices are available
ACC
•
Some electrical devices are available
•
Mechanical power (vehicle propulsion) is not available
RUN
•
Driving position
•
All electrical devices are available
•
As long as READY appears in the instrument cluster
display, it does not matter if the engine is running or
not, vehicle propulsion is available
START
•
The vehicle will start
NOTE:
Vehicle propulsion is only available after the vehicle has
passed through the START positi on.
Conditions Which May Cause The Engine To Run
•
When the Hybrid Battery State of Charge (SOC) has
reached <1%
•
When applying maximum vehicle acceleration
•
While maintaining the Exhaust System Cat alyst Tem-
perature in Hybrid or e -Save modes
•
When the hood is open with the ignition in RUN,
post-START mode
•
When Manual Mode/Tip Mode is in use
•
When the engine is temporarily operating in Fuel
and Oil Refresh Mode (e.g. if the system detects a
stale fuel o r aged oil condition after a long period
without combustion engine operation)
•
When the vehicle is started in very cold ambient
temperatures
•
When the vehicle is in a lower ambient temperature
and may need to support passenger compartment
heating
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the START/STOP ignitio n button, the key fob
may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a
backup met hod can be used to o pera te the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side with the
mechanical flip key) against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
•
Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
•
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver
etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition switch.
This button comes as an a ssembly, and is not
removable. This can damage the silicone shield.
NOTE:
In extreme climates (hot or cold environments), the
vehicle will need to be plugged in prior to starting the
vehicle, or the vehicle may not start.
WARNING!
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a locatio n accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or RUN position. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for theft. Always
turn the vehicle off, remove the key fobs from the
vehicle, and lock all the do or s when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in the
RUN position with an EVSE connected to the vehicle,
the instrument cluster display will not display the
READY state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply Equip-
ment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle, the vehicle
will go into the READY state. If the vehicle is not shifted
out of PARK 30 minutes after being unplugged, the
vehicle will disable the READY state. After an additional
30 minutes with no change in ignition status, the igni-
tion will tu rn off and the vehicle will power down.
For more information on normal starting, see
page 146.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintai ning security. The system has
a range of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfor t able climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 352.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine i n a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas conta ins carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhale d.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and relea se the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and
swing gate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice,
and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start
button again will shut the engine off.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, t he
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition mu st be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Swing gate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security system indica tor flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
All removable doors must not be removed
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine i n a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas conta ins carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhale d.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, either push and release the unlock button on the key
fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry vi a the door handles,
and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the cli mate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the me ssage “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once t he timer expires, the system will au tomati-
cally adjust the settings de pendi ng on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfor t Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather con-
ditions. The he ated steering wheel and driver heated
seat feature will turn on if programmed in the Comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
page 201.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle
will adjust the climate control settings dependent on
the outside ambient temperature.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear climate system, it
will remain off to allow for optimal front row
performance.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh ai r entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last set ti ngs selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 74.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer wi ll activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start
or exits Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Canceled — Swing Gate Open
•
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
•
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the i gniti on is placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(PHEV Only)
NOTE:
Remote Start while the vehicle is plugged in may not
always start the engine.
This system uses t he key fob to start the
vehicle conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still mai ntai ning security. The system
has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start also activates the Climate Control system
in temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C), and the heated
seats (if equipped) and heated steering wheel
(if equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Swing gate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key fob Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security system indica tor flashing
•
Ignition in OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
All removable doors must not be removed
•
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off while the
vehicle’s propulsion system is active
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine i n a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas conta ins carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and relea se the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the turn signals will flash twice (if enabled in
Uconnect Settings), and the horn will chirp twice (if
enabled in Uco nnect Settings). Then the engine/vehicle
will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle can be started two consecutive times
(two 15 minute cycles) using the key fob. After two
Remote Start events have occurred, the ignition
must be placed in the RUN position before any addi-
tional Remote Start requests can be received.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
WITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and relea se the Remote Start button one time or
allow the Remote Start cycle to complete the e nti re
15 minute cycle.
In addition, the ignition can be placed in the RUN (Pro-
pulsion System Available) position by pushing the igni-
tion button with the key fob inside the vehicle, and then
pushing the ignit io n button one more time to place the
ignition in the OFF positi on.
NOTE:
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
•
For additional functions of the Remote Start system,
see
page 38.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING
(SCC)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm up
or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a planned
departure time. The target temperature is preset to the
same values used by the Remote Start feature. Unlike
Remote Start, the driver does not ne ed to initiate the
cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote Start button,
instead, a programmed departure time will be used.
Also, all schedu led cabin conditi oni ng will be powered
by the vehicle’s high voltage battery working in conjunc-
tion with a ny EVSE connected to the vehicle. Unlike
Remote Start, in SCC the vehicle’s gas engine will not
start to provide power or heat for cabin conditioning.
In order to conserve the vehicle’s high voltage battery
power, the driver can choose between allowing the bat-
tery to be drained of power down to <1%, or to stop the
SCC when the high voltage bat tery has been depleted
to 25% State Of Charge (SOC). The battery percentages
are displayed in the instrument cluster display.
A maximum of three indepe ndent schedule event tim-
ers are available for use by the SCC feature and Sched-
uled Charging feature for charging the high voltage bat-
tery. The timers may be used in any combination for
SCC and Scheduled Charging, but only three total tim-
ers are available.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle so
that the Climate Control system can condition the pas-
senger cabin pri or to the scheduled departure time.
Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient tem-
perature, and the next programmed departure time, the
vehicle will determine when to begin cabin conditioning.
Cabin conditioning can begin up to 30 minutes pr io r to
the scheduled departure time, provided the stated high
voltage battery cond it io ns are met.
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time.
Once a schedu led event has been cr eated, it can be
applied to one or more days of the week. The sched-
uled event can also be set to occur only during the cur-
rent week, or repeat every week until the feature is
turned off or the event is changed.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors Closed
•
Hood Closed
•
Liftgate Closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Key fob not located inside the vehicle
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Remote Start has not been activated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Hybrid Electric App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
3. Select the schedule to be set (1,2, or 3) by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
touchscreen.
4. Choose “Climate Schedule”.
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage bat-
tery drops to 25% or lower.
6.
Set the Departure Time: Hours, Minutes, and AM/PM.
7. Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days of
the week will be grayed out and the vehicle will per-
form only one SCC event, which will occur at the
next available time that matches the SCC event time
(regardless of what day it was originally set to occur
before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To sc hedu le another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door lo cks are disabled. The
Vehicle Security system provides both audible and vis-
ible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security system will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps
and/or turn s ignals will flash, and the Vehicle Secu ri ty
Light in the instrument clu ster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Secur ity system:
1. If any doors or windows are open, close them.
2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
Schedules Screen
Select Climate Schedule
Set Climate Schedule
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the dri ver and/or passenger door open.
○
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 42.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using t he manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
page 42.
•
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
•
When the Vehicle Security system i s armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is de signe d to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create co ndit io ns where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system i s armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something tr iggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the tri gger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using t he manual door lock.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling a nd storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors ar e equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle,
push the rocker lever forward to the lock positi on and
close the do or. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever
rearward.
NOTE:
The mechanical key can be used to lock or unlock the
doors, swing gate (if equipped with a lock), glove com-
partment, and console storage.
WARNING!
•
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always switch of f the igni-
tion and re move the key from the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use o f vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location ac cessi ble to children. A child c ould
operate power wi ndows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front
door panel. Pus h the switch forward to unlock the
doors, and rea rward to lock the doors.
WARNING!
•
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always switch of f the igni-
tion and re move the key from the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use o f vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location ac cessi ble to children. A child c ould
operate power wi ndows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swi ng gate
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within the
Uconnect Settings
page 201.
•
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Pas-
sive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these
devices may interfere with the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
•
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, parking lights) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signals.
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is s alt/d irt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlo ck sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is o pened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security
system.
Power Door Lock Switch
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob wi thi n 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the dri ver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door
handle will unlock all doors and the swing gate
automatically.
NOTE:
Either the d ri ver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depend-
ing on the selected setting in the Uconne ct system
page 201.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function only if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a START/
STOP ignition. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid Passi ve Entry key
fob while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the do or is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive
Entry is disabled using Uconnect system, the key fob
protection described in this section remains
active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors dur ing a FOBIK-
Safe oper ati o n when a valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors whe n any of the following condi ti ons are true:
•
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected out-
side of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle).
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door pane l switch, and then the doors are
closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into
the swing gate hand le. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, grab
the swing gate handle to unlock the swing gate auto-
matically, and pull the swing gate to open.
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob wi thi n 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the swing gate hand le, pushing the Passive Entry lock
button will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door hand le without the vehicle unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Set-
tings, the key fob protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)"
remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted
page 352.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled , the door locks will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be
enabled or d isable d by an autho ri zed dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for sma ll children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat -
blade screwdriver (or mechanical flip key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock pos iti on.
NOTE:
•
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the do or can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the unlocked position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the locked position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim
panel), lower the window and open the door with the
outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, i t is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the c ar, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
•
All occupants mus t wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
page 195.
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may cause personal injury in the event of
an accident.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
•
Doors are he avy; use caution when removing them.
•
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-
road driving tips, se e
page 195.
•
When front doors are removed, the message “Blind
Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in
the instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and
Power Door Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2.
Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outsid e hinges (using a #T50 Tor x head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the
rear cargo t ray located under the rear load floor.
3.
Remove the plastic wiring access do or under the
instrument panel by sliding the plas tic panel along the
door frame toward the seats unti l the tabs are
detached.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Screw
Wiring Access Door
Closed Wiring Harness
1 – Red Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness Lever (Closed Position)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under
the wiring harne ss, and lift the harness lever into
the open posit io n.
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight down-
ward on the wiring connector to unplug. Store the
wiring connector in the lower door basket.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the
check screw from the d oo r check attachment on the
bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation. See the note later in this sec-
tion if t he check arm gets pushed into the doo r
while the do or is off.
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the door,
and lower them into the body hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in guidi ng the door into place during installation.
2. With the door in the open position, align the door
check bracket with the hole on the bodyside. Insert
the check screw and tighten using a #40 Torx head
driver to 19.9 f t· lb (27.0 N·m).
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten t he screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
NOTE:
If the check arm is stuck inside the door, follow these
instructions to install the check arm.
1. Insert the check arm screw into the check arm
bracket. Ensure the screw is in the correct
orientation.
2. Slowly pull on the screw to dr aw the check arm out
until you encounter increased resistance. Do not
attempt to pull the check arm all the way out.
3. While sitting inside the vehicle, hold the door par-
tially closed and insert the screw into the hole on
the body.
4. Using your fingers, turn the screw clockwise at least
two full turns. Gently pull on the screw to ensure it is
secure.
5. Using the door handle, slowly push the door open.
The check arm will be pulled out of the door. You
may hear the check arm pop against the screw.
6. Fully tighten the screw as instructed.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
Open Wiring Harness
1 – Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 – Black Security Tab
Door Check Arm
Hinge Pin Locations
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s par t s will occur.
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s door into
the harness just inside the vehicle, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring connec-
tor during installation. Close the door slightly to provide
more slack if needed.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring connector
straight into the wiring harness u nti l the wiring har-
ness lever star t s to lower with the latching pin.
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring connector
into the harness will result in damage that is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
2. After the harness lever has started to move with the
pressure of seating the wi ring connector, co nti nue
by lowering the wiring harness lever to the fully
closed position.
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into
place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the metal
hook just insi de the vehicle.
5. Replace wiring access doors.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
(FOUR-DOOR MODELS)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only. Failure to follow this
warning can result in death or serious personal injury.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
Fully Closed Position
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
WARNING!
•
All occupants mus t wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
page 195.
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may fly around and cause personal injury
or death i n the event of a sudden stop, rough ter-
rain, or a collision.
NOTE:
•
Doors are he avy; use caution when removing them.
•
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-
road driving tips, se e
page 195.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2.
Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outsid e hinges (using a #T50 Tor x head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the
rear cargo t ray located under the rear load floor.
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wir-
ing connector to be unplugged.
6. With the door in the open position, remove the
check screw from the d oo r check attachment on the
body (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for
easier reinstallation.
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Scre5
Wiring Access Door
Wiring Connector
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), per form the previous steps in
the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in gui ding the door into place when reinstalling.
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT —
IF EQUIPPED
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior rear-
view mirrors can be inst alled on to t he upper body door
hinges after the front doors have been removed.
WARNING!
•
All occupants mus t wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
page 195.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle,
as they may fly around and cause personal injury
or death i n the event of a sudden stop, rough ter-
rain, or a collision.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed
as follows:
1. Remove both front doors see
page 45.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door opening
using a #40 Torx head dr iver, and store in a safe
location.
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the A-pillar,
making sure to align the bottom of the bracket with
the upper do or hinge, and the hole from the
removed cowl bolt.
Door Check Arm
Scan me
Door Off Mirror
Cowl Bolt Location
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror bracket
(over the cowl bolt hole), then insert the bracket bolt
into the mirror bracket, through the bracket bushing.
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the bottom of
the upper do or hinge up into the mi rror bracket,
then rotate the bracket knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to secure the mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge shoul-
der bolt wit h a #40 Torx head driver. Recommended
torque specification for the bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb
(8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb (10 N·m) for the hinge shoulder
bolt.
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror bracket.
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror assem-
bly, and tighten into the mirror bracket using a
#30 Torx head driver. Recommended torque specifi-
cation for the mirror screws is 4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp
bracket, the bracket bushing from step 4 is not needed.
Use the spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOOR INSTALLATION —
IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
•
Do not run half-doors through an automatic car
wash. This may result in scratches and wax
buildup on the windows.
(Continued)
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Brac ket Bolt
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
1 — Brac ket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
Mirror Screw Locations
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Careless handling and storage of the half-doors
may damage the seals resulting in water leaks into
the interior of the vehicle.
•
The upper half-door s must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
•
Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-do or win-
dows at the upper B-pillar area for both front and
rear doors to avoid damage to the windows when
not in use.
•
Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper in
temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below. Damage to
the window may occur.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
This vehicle may be equipped with half-
doors. To install the half-doors in the
vehicle, follow the instruction sheet
packaged in the box the doors were
received in. Replacement parts may be
purchased through Mopar® Service.
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For front
door removal, see
page 45. For rear door
removal, see
page 47.
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the lower
half-door, and lower them into the body hinges on
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in gui ding the door into place during
installation.
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten t he screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
CAUTION!
•
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
•
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s par t s will occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to the
metal hook ju st inside the vehicle.
Scan me
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
Cloth Strap Attachment
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower half-door to
the connection just inside the vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is
closed completely.
6. Replace wiring access doors.
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the vehicle,
the lower half-doors will have plugs in the post holes
that must be removed prior to upper half-door instal-
lation. To remove these plugs, proceed as follows:
a. Locate the service ho le in the center of each
plug of the lower half-door (two on each front and
rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
c. Using the tool, slowly pull u pwards from the cen-
ter of the plug to remove.
8. Making sure the window on the upper half-door is
completely zipped closed, insert the upper half-door
into the lower half-door by placing the posts into the
post holes.
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper half-
door until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Door Latch Alignment
CAUTION!
Upon first inst allati on of the half-doors, slowly set the
door almost to the closing position and check how
the door latch aligns with the body striker. Touch con-
dition between these components can result in dam-
age to both the door and the striker.
Front Door Wiring Harness
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the st ri ker.
DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could affect the posi-
tioning of t he full door.
If the doo r does not center align between the latch and
the striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
2.
With the bolts loose, hold the door in the almost closed
position, and check that the latch and striker align.
3.
With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to close the
door softly and tighten the hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb /
27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Lower Door Adjustment
CAUTION!
Upon first installat ion of the half-doors, slowly close
each door to check for body contact. Improper setting of
the door hinge s can cause extreme non-uniform condi-
tions, and resu lt in damage to the body around the door.
If the door does not latch properly after installation, if
there is i nterference between the panels, or if a non-
uniform gap around the door is observed when the door
is closed (example: door position appears to be low and
too far rear ward), the position of the door on its hinges
may need to be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part
of the doo r latch, as modifications to these parts will
affect installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved for ward
by pushing the door handle toward the front of the
vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing the door handle
and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle body
are uniform around the entire door, tighten the door
hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque:
27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or wind
noise is o bserved, the seal of the upper half-door to the
door opening may need to be adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be
adjusted, proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size piece
of paper along the top o f the door opening against
the vehicle near where the leak/noise was
observed. Make sure half of the paper is above the
area where t he door seal contacts the door opening,
while the other half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the paper
upward. If the paper moves with little to no effort,
the upper half-d oor will need to be adju sted in that
area to increase seal compression.
There is another optional test that can be performed
using a flashlight and the help of another person.
Hinge Bolt Locations
Hinge Bolt Locations
Performing A Paper Test
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
One person shou ld be inside the vehicle, and move the
flashlight around the periphery of the door seal, shining
outward. The other person should stand outside of the
vehicle and check for light passing by the seal. If light is
seen through the se al area, the door will need to be
adjusted.
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up and
away from the lower half. Lay the upper half-door on
a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not provided),
loosen the nu t located inside the bottom of the
upper half-door post, closest to where the “paper
test” detected a gap.
3. Usinga3mmAllen wrench (not provided), rotate
the screw on t he side of the post counterclockwise
(while holding the wrench on the loosened bolt) to
increase the seal compression. If needed, rotate
clockwise to reduce seal compression.
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post using
the wrench and make sure the screw head is flush
to the post. Reinstall the upper half-door.
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”. Repeat
the adjustment procedure if needed.
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower half-
door pocket to seal the upper half-door to the roof:
a. Lift upper half-d oo r up and away from lower half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive
side of the shim and place the shim with pencil
into the pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the pocket,
and remove the pencil once the shim is fi rmly in
place.
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
1—3mmAllen Wrench
2—8mmOpen-End Wrench
Screw Head Flush To Post
Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the front
upper corner of the rear doors, deformation of the seal
will occur.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation steps
in reverse order.
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward
firmly on the middle of the upper half-door until the
posts detach from the lower half.
Half-Door Mirror Installation — PHEV Only
In PHEV models, the exterior mirrors for the half-doors
are shipped se parately and will need to be i nsta lled.
To install the front door exterior mirrors on the half-
doors, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the wiring harness on the outside of the front
half-door.
2. Insert the wiring harness firmly into the connection
on the dri ver’s side exterior mirror.
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half Door To Remove
Wiring Harness Location
Connect Wiring Harness To Exterior Mirror
1 — Wiring Harness
2 — Exterior Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
3. Place the base of the exterior mirror into the hole on
the door, and support it while attaching the three
mirror bolts through the inside of t he door using a
#T40 Torx head driver.
NOTE:
Recommended torque for the mirror bolts is
5.9 ft· lb / 8.0 N·m.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 on the opposite side front door.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located on the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle u pward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heat ing ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the instrument
panel below the radio. You can access the button
through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating e leme nt on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 38.
Attach Exterior Mirror
1 — Support Mirror From Outside
2 — Attach Three Mirror Bolts From Inside
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of a dvanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care whe n using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if use d for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type or material. This may
cause the s teering wheel heater to overheat.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo ar ea, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more li kely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more li kely to be seriously injure d or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collisi on and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to ad just seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the se atback.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desi re d position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position i s reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the dir ect io n of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rear-
ward. Push the power recline switch forward or rear-
ward. The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position
has been reache d.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could re su lt in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the ou tboa rd side of t he power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum-
bar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will rais e and lower the position of the support.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT
SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using
a bar located by the front of the seat cu shio n, near the
floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion a nd move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure, move for-
ward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collisi on and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by
using the rat che ting handle, located on the outbo ard
side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the
seat, push downward on the handle to lower the seat.
Several strokes may be necessary to achieve the
desired position.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or backward, depending on the direction you
would like the seatback to move. Release the strap
when the desi re d position is reached and the seatback
will lock into place.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar Location Seat Height Adjustment
Recline Strap
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could re su lt in serious injury or death.
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard
side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward
to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumba r support.
Front Easy Entry Seat — Two Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the out-
board side of the seatback, and slide the entire seat
forward.
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until
the track loc ks.
NOTE:
•
Front s eat s equipped with power adjustment will not
be equipped with an easy entr y lever.
•
The front seats (if equipped with manual adjust-
ment) have a track memory, which returns the seat
to its original position.
•
The recline st rap and easy entry lever should not be
used during the automatic returning of the seat to
its sitting position.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
WARNING!
Do not place luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four
Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
NOTE:
•
Be sure t hat the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
•
The center head restraints must be in the lowest
position to avoid contact with the center console
when folding the seat.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in the se areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lumbar Control Knob
Easy Entry Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
TO FOLD DOWN THE REAR SEAT
There are two release levers located on each upper
outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two
release levers folds down the seat and the head
restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds down
the head re str aint independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever
and slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint
will fold automatically with the seat when this lever is
pulled.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, the seat cush-
ion will ret ur n to its normal shape over time.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
Raise the se atbac k and lock it into place. Then, raise
the head re str aint until it locks into place. If interfer-
ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from
fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to
its proper position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If t he seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Flip And Fold Rear Seat — PHEV Only
The 60/40 split rear seat can be folded down for added
cargo space. To fold the rear seat, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the seat cushion by grabbing the outer edges of
the cushion and pulling upward.
2. Flip the seat cushion up and forward.
3. Pull the seatback release lever upward fully (located
on the out board side of the rear se atback).
NOTE:
Pulling the lever partway will fold the head restraint
forward. Pulling it all the way up will release the
seatback.
Seatback Release Lever
Lift Seat Cushion
Flip Seat Bottom Forward
Lift Seatback Release Lever Up
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fold the seatback forward against the floor.
5. Repeat on the other side if desired.
To Raise The Rear Seat
1. Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents t he
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
2. Raise the head restraint until it locks into place.
3. Return the seat cushion to its original position.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely locked
into position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serio us injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not store items on top of the battery underneath
the seat cushi on. The rear seat bottom must not
have any obstruction that prevents it from being in
the fully lowered position, otherwise the bottom may
not lock during frontal impact. If the seat cushion is
not fully lowered, serious injury could occur.
FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR SEAT —
TWO DOOR MODELS
NOTE:
•
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
•
Be sure t hat the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seat back release lever and fold the seat-
back forward.
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on the back
of the rear seat and two corresponding wire loops
located on the back of each B-pillar. Open the hook-
and-loop fastener on the strap and thread through
the wire lo op. Fold the hook-and-loop fastener over
to keep the seat in the folded position. This should
be done on both sides.
2. To return the seat to its normal upright position,
reverse these steps.
Fold Seatback Down
Rear Seatback Release Lever
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull
the seat o ut and away from the lower bracket.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To re inst all the rear seat, just reverse these steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reat tachi ng the rear
seat latches.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in the se areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with sea ts and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if se ats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fu lly
latched.
REAR SEAT ARMREST —
IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull
strap under the head rest rai nt and pull it forward.
NOTE:
The cupholder li ner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If t he seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
UNFOLDING THE REAR ARMREST —
PHEV ONLY
Raise the r ear center head restraint, then pull the rear
armrest tab to release it from the seat and pull for ward.
Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the se at and
pull forward.
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a
rear armrest with cupholders.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located
on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED sett ing on.
Release Bar Location
Rear Seat Armrest
Armrest Tab Location
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating e leme nts off.
NOTE:
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
•
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 38.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of a dvanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care whe n using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased sur face
temperature of the seat.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, inc lud ing the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper pos iti ons
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint , push the adjust-
ment button located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. The release
button does not need to be pushed to adjust the head
restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release but-
ton at the base of e ach post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of t he vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of t he head.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Bu tton
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door
Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but fold-
able head res trai nts.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release
strap located on the upper ou tbo ard side of e ach rear
seat.
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift
up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
page 239.
WARNING!
•
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear se at. In a collision, people riding in this
area without the head r estr ai nts installed are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of t he vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door
Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but fold-
able, outboard head restraints, as well as an adjust-
able, removable center head restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the inner
release lever, located on the upper part of the rear
seat.
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift
up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head re str aint , push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Locations
Rear Head Restraints Folded
Rear Head Restraint Lever
Rear Head Restraint Folded
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the center head restraint, push the release
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
pull upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release button
while pushing downward on the head restraint. For
information on child seat tether routing, see
page 239.
NOTE:
Lower the center head rest rai nt to avoid contact with
the center console when folding the seat down.
WARNING!
•
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear se at. In a collision, people riding in this
area without the head r estr ai nts installed are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of t he vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
•
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say:
•
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“Help” to hear a list o f suggested Voice Commands.
•
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The
VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until af ter the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pu shing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 352.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror sho uld be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night posit io n (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror sho uld be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is d isable d when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through Uconnect Settings
page 201.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any clea ning solution dire ct ly onto the mirror.
Apply the soluti on onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent la ne of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your pas-
senger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger si de mirror.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Vanity Mirror
Outside Rearview Mirror
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which fla sh with
the corresponding turn signal li ghts in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to
select the mi rror t hat you want to adjust.
Using the mirror co ntrol swit ch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mir ror to
move.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are he ated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 74.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink®) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt
battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLi nk®
button.
•
The HomeLink® indi cator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is di sable d when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 352.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recomme nde d that you erase all the channels o f
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
Power Mirror Switch
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLi nk® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button i s not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOO R OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and obser ve the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/no n-rolling cod e
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can u su-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and releas e the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is co mplete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates.
If the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the fi nal steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates.
If the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
(Continued)
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon mon-
oxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon monox-
ide is poiso nou s when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a mis-
cellaneous device follows the same procedure as pro-
gramming to a garage door opener
page 68. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmi tter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of tr ans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate ope rators are designed to
time-out in t he same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or no n-rolling cod e.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Ind ica tor light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remai ning steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmi tter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of tr ans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate ope rators are designed to
time-out in t he same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the gar age
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignit io n in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® wi th the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage doo r remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4.
Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 second s or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indic ator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels be fore you se ll or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individu al channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are so me of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage doo r opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com for
information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the tra nsmit ter. Exhaust gas
can cause ser io us injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transmitter with a garage door
(Continued)
WARNING!
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage do or opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight swit ch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights,
and fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated whe n the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for head-
light, parking light, and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parki ng lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Fog Light Switch
3 — Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Fog Light Switch
3 — Dimmer Control
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRLS) — IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are active when the low
beams are not on, and the engine is running. DRLs may
be deactivated by applying the parking brake.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, o r reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal i s activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multi funct io n lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The lever
will return to the centered position. To return the head-
lights to low beam, pull the lever toward the steering
wheel, or push the lever toward the instrument panel.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by auto-
matically controlling the high beams through the use of
a camera mounted on the vehicle’s header. This cam-
era detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High
Beam” within your Uconnect Settings
page 201,
as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO
position and placing the multifu ncti on lever in the
high beam positio n.
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or ca mer a lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to tu rn on, and
remain on, unt il the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or o ff
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight ti me delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignitio n into the OFF position. To turn the auto-
matic system off, move the headlight switch out of the
AUTO posi ti on.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headli ghts, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sou nd when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog light
switch. Pushing the fog light switch a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either li ght remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are
opened, by rotating the dimmer control on the headlight
switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of
the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center
light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light
can be turned on by pus hing the lens. Pushing the lens
a second ti me will turn the light off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating t he dimmer control to the extreme bottom posi-
tion will caus e all the interior lights to turn off. This
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
DIMMER CONTROL
The dimmer cont rol is part of the headlight switch and
is located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Front Fog Light Switch
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Dome Lights
Dimmer Control
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights. Rotating the dimmer con-
trol will also adjust the interior and ambient li ght levels
(e.g. courtesy lights in the footwell, illuminated cuphold-
ers, and front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wi per/washer control lever is located on
the right sid e of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-
speed wiper o pera tio n.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and
the wipers free ze to the windshie ld, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever
to the first detent position for one o f four intermittent
settings. The d e lay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off posi tio n, the wipers
will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wip-
ers will turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is rele ase d the washer will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation (If Equipped)
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single
wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will
continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 298.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER —
IF EQUIPPED
A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield
wiper/washer lever controls the operation o f the rear
wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the instrument
panel to activate the rear washer. The
washer pump and wiper will continue to
operate as long as the lever is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the washer will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return
to the parked position. When the vehicle is restarted,
the wiper will resume functi on at whichever position the
switch is se t at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the tem-
perature, air flow, and direction of air circulating through-
out the vehicle. The controls are lo cated on the touch-
screen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and releas e the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest o ut put of air. The MAX A/C indica-
tor illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing
the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is o n. In
MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other set-
tings will cause the MAX A/C to turn off.
A/C Button
Press and rele ase this button on the touch-
screen, or pu sh the button on the faceplate
to change the current setting. The A/C indi-
cator illuminates when A/C is on.
The A/C button allows the operator to manually activate
or deactivate the A/C system. When the A/C system is
turned on, c ool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and rele ase this button on the touch-
screen, or pu sh the button on the faceplate,
to change the system between recirculation
mode and ou tsi de air mode. The Recircula-
tion indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when ou tsid e conditions, su ch as smoke, odors,
dust, or hi gh humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode i s not recommended. Recirculation mode
may automatically adjust to optimize customer experi-
ence for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press and
release the AUTO button on the touchscreen,
or push the button on the faceplate. AUTO will
achieve and maintain your desired tempera-
ture by automatically adjusting the blower speed and air
distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO ope rat io n to improve performance. AUTO mod e is
highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this bu tton on the touchscreen, or push the but-
ton on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic mode
page 76
.
Front Defrost Button
Press and rele ase this button on the touch-
screen, or pu sh and release the button on
the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the wind shie ld and side window demist
outlets. When t he defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system returns to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and releas e the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the bu t-
ton on the faceplate, to turn on t he rear win-
dow defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating e leme nts:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a sof t cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up
And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or pres s and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touch-
screen for warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Climate Control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off . The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate o r the buttons on the touchscreen.
•
Faceplate: The blower speed increas es as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setti ng. The blower can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area between
the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode button on
the faceplate to adjust the airflow distribu-
tion. The airflow distribution can be adjusted
so air come s from the instrument panel outlets , floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instr ume nt
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of ai rflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor o ut let s. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the f loo r outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor ou tle ts. A slight
amount of ai r is directed through the defrost
and side wi ndow demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is di re cted through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is go od for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and rele ase the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC) — IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed
to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature within Uconnect Settings
page 201.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and tra nsiti on into Auto mode.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is bei ng used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion pro-
tection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concentra-
tion of coola nt is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months i s not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 333.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on t he inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mo de and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obst ru cti ons, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice , slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and po llen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running co ndi ti on.
Operating Tips Chart
The following chart is for Manual Override Operation.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mod e control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minu te to
flush out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather Turn
(A/C) on and set the
mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humi d
Conditions
Set the mod e control to
(Floor Mode) and turn (A/C)
on to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mod e control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield fog-
ging starts to occur, move the
control to
(Mix Mode).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
ment open may result in injury in a collis io n.
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower stor-
age compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top
latch. To access the lower storage compartment, lift the
bottom latch.
If equipped, the center console storage may have a
locking mechanism.
Rear Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is located
underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cargo
strap/handle at t he rear of the cargo area.
Glove Compartment
Console Storage Latches
1 — Upper Compar tme nt Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch
Console Storage Lock
Rear Storage Cover (Four Door Models)
Rear Storage Cover (Two Door Models)
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS —
IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the dim-
mer control
page 72.
USB/AUX CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel,
below the climate controls. Behind the media hub
access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a
Type C USB port and one standard USB port. Both USB
ports allow you to play music from MP3 players, smart-
phones or USB devices through the vehicle’s sound
system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to Android
Auto™ or Apple Carplay® in the Uconnect Radio Instruc-
tion Manual.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
•
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the system.
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports can be
used at the same time but cannot be used simulta-
neously while playing media. When both Type C and
Type A charge-only USB port s are in use they will be
charged at a reduced rate.
•
Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to play music from USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are located
behind the ce nter console, above the power inverter.
Both ports are charge only.
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the
USB ports, the following message may display depend-
ing on the device being utilized:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost.”
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device.”
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device i s not supported by the system.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device while
driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision.
Media Hub
1—AUXPort
2—TypeCUSBPort
3—TypeAUSBPort
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
POWER OUTLETS
There are t wo 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
with the stand ard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available
when the igniti on switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
second power outlet located in the rear cargo area and
is powered directly from the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse .
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this out let is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellu lar phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from star ti ng.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use the se intermit-
tently and with gr eater caution.
(Continued)
Front Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(battery powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or
ACC positi on)
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods o f the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alter-
nator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC curr ent .
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit , as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 W, the power inverter may
have to be rese t manually.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this out let is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES —
IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank
of the instr ume nt panel can be used to power various
electrical devices. You have the ability to confi gure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect
Settings
page 201.
All switches can be configured as follows:
•
Switch type operation: Latching or Momentary
•
Power source: Battery or Ignition
•
Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On or Off
NOTE:
Holding last st ate conditions are met when switch type
is set to latching and power sou rce is set to ignition.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power
four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
Power Inverter
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, in the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
Wire Color Chart
Circuit
Function
Fuse
Wire
Color
Locations
Aux Switch 1
F93 –
40 Amp
Beige/
Pink
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel) & Under-
hood (right sid e
near battery)
Circuit
Function
Fuse
Wire
Color
Locations
Aux Switch 2
F92 –
40 Amp
Green/
Pink
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel) & Under-
hood (right sid e
near battery)
Aux Switch 3
F103 –
15 Amp
Orange/
Pink
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel) & Under-
hood (right sid e
near battery)
Aux Switch 4
F108 –
15 Amp
Dark
Blue/
Pink
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel) & Under-
hood (right sid e
near battery)
Battery
F72 –
10 Amp
Red/
White
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel)
Ignition
F50 –
10 Amp
Pink/
Orange
Interior (passen-
ger side u nder
instrument
panel)
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel below the climate controls. Push the switch
downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and
the top right switch controls the right front window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, o r in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
Power Window Switches
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way (manually), push the win-
dow switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will canc el this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower lef t switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right
rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are wind ow switches located on the rear of the
center console for the rear passenger windows in the
four-door model.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power and the passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down to the second detent and release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operat io n, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors. To dis-
able the window controls, rotate the switch downward.
To enable the window controls, rotate the switch
upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on t he ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the Power Sliding Top (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with t he rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WRANGLER TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes
the necessary tools required for the operations
described in the following sections. All pi ece s fit into the
ratchet for easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen-
dently.
Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at the same
time.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four door
models only), the soft top system will be provided in a
separate box located in the rear of the vehicle for ship-
ping purposes o nly.
Window Lockout Switch
Provided Tools
1 — Ratche t
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP INTO
SUNRIDER® POSITION
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the elements.
Do not rely on them to contain occupants within
the vehicle or to protect against injury during an
accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
•
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when inst alling and removing the soft tops.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may
cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught
in between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunt-
ing, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any addi-
tional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it diffi-
cult to put up. This i s caused by a natural contra cti on of
the vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the
top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size
and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is
41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
•
Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
•
Do not fully lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
•
For important information on cleaning and caring
for your vehicle's fabric top
page 336.
•
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
•
It is recomme nde d that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
•
Careless handling a nd storage of the soft top may
damage the sea ls, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
•
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
Scan me
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Side View Components
1—#1Bow 6—#6Bow
2—#2Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3—#3Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4—#4Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5—#5Bow
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
Two Door Side View Components
1—#1Bow 6—#6Bow
2—#2Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3—#3Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4—#4Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5—#5Bow
86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two And Four Door Rear Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
NOTE:
•
All lowering and raising the soft top instructio ns are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
•
Images shown are of four door mode ls, and appear-
ance of two door model components may dif fer.
The following options are available to you when lower-
ing your vehicle’s soft top:
•
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter windows
installed
•
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter panels
removed
•
Sunrider® position with rear window installed and
quarter panels removed
•
Fully lowered position with rear and quarter windows
removed
Both quar ter windows should be removed and installed
together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the
#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link
to fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider®
position.
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunri de r® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fas-
teners provided in the center console.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® position
with the rea r window and quarter panel assemblies
fully installed or completely removed.
•
The rear window and rear quarter windows must be
removed before fully lowering the soft top to prevent
damage to the top. Clean the side and rear windows
before removal to assist in preventing scratching
during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retain-
ers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through an
authorized dealer.
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
Step Four
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear window and
rear quarter windows must be removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s
plastic retainers from the lower right and lef t
corners.
2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and
upward releasing it from both the right and left
retainers.
3. While holding the window in place, slide the swing
gate bar to the left separating it from the rear win-
dow. Store in soft window bag (if equipped), or a
safe loc ati on.
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter win-
dow pillars.
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left
until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do
not pull downward while removing the rear window.
Damage to the retainer could result.
Step One
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner
outward and release tab from the bottom of the win-
dow pillar.
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at the
upper front corner of each quarter window.
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic
retainer from along the bottom of the window mov-
ing toward the front of the vehicle.
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top
of the front window.
5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until
it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not
pull downward while removing the window. Dam-
age to the retainer could result.
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a safe
location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag, refer
to the next section.
Step One
Step Two
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five
90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Soft Top Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear quar-
ter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear win-
dow, does not store in the so ft window storage bag
(if equipped).
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both fabric
dividers downward and lay the first quarter window
all the way to the right side with the inside of the
window facing downward and the window pillar to
the outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on the
inside of the window pillar.
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first quar-
ter window.
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of t he first
divider all the way to the left side with the inside of
the window facing downward and the window pillar
to the outside.
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the second
quarter window.
Step One
Step One
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
Step Two
Step Three
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
Step Four
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second divider.
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Lowering The Soft Top All The Way
1. Remove the rear window and quarter pane l windows
page 89.
2. From the Sunrider® position
page 84, remove
straps if previously se cu red and move to the rear of
the vehicle.
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6 Bow of
the soft top on the left side.
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft
top to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the
stowed position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the Soft Top or vehicle.
5. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.
6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position, push
downward on each side of the folded soft top to
ensure it is secure. A n audible “click” may be heard.
Step Five
Step Six
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five (Locked Position)
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fas-
teners provided in the center console.
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully
Lowered Position
1. From the fully lowered position,
remove straps if previously secured.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the
lock lever on the left and right side lift assist mecha-
nisms to the “unlock” position.
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the
guide track until it locks into the Sunrider® position
with an audible “click”.
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the
top is locked in the Sunrider® positio n.
5. Using the side link, lif t and push the soft top toward
the front of the vehicle manually guiding the top into
the closed po sit io n.
Step Six
Step Six
Scan me
Step Two
Step Three
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
Step Five
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into its
receiver. Repeat on the other side.
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
Installing The Soft Top Windows
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the
window into the retainer and slide forward while
keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side.
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the
top cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps
could result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
Step Five
Step Six
Step Seven
Step One
Step Two
Step Two
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the windows,
ensuring they are fully engaged, followed by the
retainers along the bottom of the windows.
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper
front corner of each quarter window by pressing
firmly.
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window i nto the retainer from left to
right while keeping the window level.
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers at the
bottom of the window from left to the right.
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side
retainers.
4. Line up the rear window to the right side quarter
window first, and engage the plastic retainers.
Step Three
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
Step Four
Step One
Step Two
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
6. Engage the rear window retaine rs in the lower right
and left corners.
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer to the
next section.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top
page 92.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanis m on both the left
and right sid es are in the “lock” position, and an
audible “click” is heard when pushing down on the
#1 bow from each of the lift assist mechanisms
before removing.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head screws on each
lift assist mechanism, then lift the mechanism up
and away from the vehicle.
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to
release the side link from the track.
Step Five
Step Six
Scan me
Step Two
Step Three
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Step Four
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away
from the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport
bar, trim, and tire carrier. Store the soft top in a
safe, cle an, and dry location.
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both rear cor-
ners of the vehicle, removing the retainers.
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
page 103.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front, followed
by the rear on each s ide . For instructions and appro-
priate torque specifications for the door rail Torx
screws
page 111.
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the rear of
the vehicle using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet. Refer to the following table for recom-
mended torque specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx screws. Damage to the retain-
ers will occur.
Torque
Specification
For Torx Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in dam-
age to the Soft Top or vehicle.
Step Four
Step Six
Step Seven
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the
“lock” position, lift the soft top into the rear o f the
vehicle with the side links pointing toward the front.
Lower the lift assist mechanisms onto its retainers
on both sides (on the inside of the sport bar).
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by turning them
clockwise. Secure them until t hey are snug (refer to
the following table for recommended torque specifi-
cations), being car efu l not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side.
Torque
Specification
For Torx Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail
rearward, place the side link into the guide track on
the top of the rail then release the lever.
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be di scarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
8. Raise the soft top
page 93.
NOTE:
Be sure t he wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the
top.
Step Four
Step Four
Step Five
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Step Six
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
REMOVAL
CAUTION!
•
The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare
tires, building materials, hunting or camping sup-
plies, etc. For optio nal Mopar® accessory roof
racks
page 117.
•
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•
It is recomme nde d that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door o r lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to dr ip into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The hard top assembly must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Careless handling a nd storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installati on can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2
Four Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
NOTE:
•
All hard top removal and installation instructions are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
•
Images shown are of four door mode ls, and appear-
ance of two door model components may dif fer.
•
The left side panel must be removed before remov-
ing the right side panel.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed as
follows:
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the lef t side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking
them from the roof.
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at
the top of the windshield.
4. Remove the left side panel.
5.
Repeat the previous steps to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag —
If Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to
store your hard top panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so the
loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and
fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the f ront panel latch is closed prior to inserting
the panel into the panels bag.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag
with the latche s facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the f ront panel latch is closed prior to insert-
ing the panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag
closed.
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with the
hooks and stra ps facing the back of the rear seat.
Attach the clip at the bottom of the bag to the child
restraint anchorage, located at the base of the rear
seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the str ap through the buckle.
Pull on the strap to t ighten the Freedom Top bag
securely against the rear s eat .
Step Two
Step Three
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Unlatched Position
Step Four
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
INSTALLATION
1. Open the header latch inside the vehicle, and the
three L-shaped locks on each panel.
2. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame
with the locat ing pin in the front receiver mo unt ing
hole followed by the left side pane l, making sure
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the pan-
els are sit ting flush with the body.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clea r of any dust and debris prior to
reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels
page 99.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, remove the two Torx head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of
the front doors).
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside —
three screws on each side) u sing the #50 Torx head
driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance
of the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the left
rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Three
Step Four
Step Five
Step Six
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
2
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.
8. To r emove the wiring harness, push the tab inward
while pulling downward to disconnect.
9. To r emove the washer hose, push the release button
on hose conne ctor, and pull downward.
10. Store the wire harness and washer hose in the
compartment below the trim. To access the stor-
age compartment, lift the trim cover as shown.
11. Secure the wire harness within the compartment
by plugging it into the receptacle and reengaging
the locking tab.
Step Seven
Step Eight
Step Eight
Step Nine
Step Ten
Step Eleven
104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12. Secure the washer hose by snapping it i n next to
the receptacle, then replace the compartment
cover.
13. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.
14. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the
hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the rear Hard Top requires four adults,
one located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the H ard Top.
INSTALLING THE HAR D TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage,
they must be removed prior to installation of the hard
top. For removal procedures, see
page 110.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sit ti ng flush with the
body at the sides and check to ensu re that there is a
uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top. Then
follow the removal steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
•
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
•
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the
body should be torqued as follows using the pro-
vided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet:
○ Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
(13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
○ Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb (17.5 N·m
+/- 3.5 N·m)
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD TOP
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while driving.
Operating the top while driving could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
The Sunrider® so ft top can be used in place of the
Hard Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy opening of
the area above the driver and front passenger seats.
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
page 99.
2. With the help of a second person, set the Sunrider®
top onto the top of the vehicle making sure to align
the holes at the front and rear of the side rails.
Step Twelve
Sunrider® For Hard Top
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and inse rt the door rail attachment bolt (pro-
vided bolt wi thou t spacer) from underneath. Tighten
with a #40 Torx head dr iver until snug.
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt with spacer ) from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the front
and rear do or rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb
(12 N·m).
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear clamp
attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until snug.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear
clamp attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the Sunrid er ®
top forward using the integrated handle on the front
header of t he top. Manually guide the top into the
closed position.
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook into its
receiver. Pull the handle back upward while squeez-
ing the hook, locking the latch into place. Repeat on
the other side.
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
Rear Clamp Location
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
Engage Both Header Latches
106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and push
the top rearward to the Sunrider® position.
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fas-
teners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and wrap
one around the si de rails on each side of the
Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
POWER SLIDING TOP —
IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to
the right of the driver’s side sun visor.
NOTE:
•
The power top is non-removable. If desired, the rear
quarter windows can be removed and stored in the
provided storage bag
page 109.
•
The power top will not open in temperatures below
-4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a higher
temperature, it can be closed at temperatures
above -40°F (-40°C).
•
The power top will not operate at vehicle speeds
above 60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when opening
and closing the Power Sli ding Top as a result of t he
Uconnect system switching between power top Closed
and power top Open audio modes.
Release Both Header Latches
Sunrider® Position
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, o r in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignitio n in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become ent rapped by the power top while
operating the power top switch. Such entrapme nt
may result in serious injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open power top. You could
also be seri ous ly injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure a ll passen-
gers are also properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the power
top. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the power top open-
ing. Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Power Top
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one-half sec-
ond and the power top will open automatically from any
position. The power top will open fully and stop
automatically.
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second and t he power top will close automatically from
any position. The power top will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Ope n or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the power top switch will stop the
power top.
Manual Open/Close
To open the power top manually, push and hold the
open switch to the full open position, then release.
To close the power top manually, push and hold the
close switch to the fully closed position, then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the power top movement. The top will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the power top during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path o f the power top is detected, the
power top will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the close switch
and release to Express Close.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top
is almost close d. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all obje cts from
the top’s path before closing.
NOTE:
•
The Power Slid ing Top may reverse motion i f closing
during a severe headwind. If this occurs, push and
hold the Power Sliding Top switch again to close the
top completely.
•
If three cons ecu ti ve power top close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable
and the power top must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the quarter window glass panel. For important
information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle
page 335.
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the vehi-
cle’s ignition is placed to the OFF po sit io n. Opening
either front door will cancel t his feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect
system
page 201.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the power
top when the “Express Mode” stops working. To rese t
the power top, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and start the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds. This
will put the power top into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while the
top goes fully open and t hen back to fu lly close.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed
position, release the close button. The power top is
now reset and ready to use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be complete,
and the procedure must be repe ated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the rear
quarter windows can be removed. To remove these win-
dows, follow this procedure:
1. Open the swing gate, and lif t the rear window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two on each
window) on the interior of the windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counterclockwise to
release.
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each window
upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the windows
after the latches are released. Damage could result
to the pins holding the windows in place.
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided stor-
age bag and keep in a safe location, or securely fas-
ten the bag to the rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter windows,
proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the fabric divider
raised, place the first quarter window with the
latches facing outward into the foam insert. Fold
divider over the window once placed inside.
2. Place the second window into the foam insert with
the latches facing outward. Fully close the bag.
NOTE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the
outside of the windows will be facing each other
with all latches facing the outside of the bag.
Step Five
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwi se
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
Step Six
Step Six
Step One
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window
(Latches Facing Outward)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
2
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo area
of the vehicle by securing the bag in the vehicle’s
cargo area. This is done by attaching the straps at
the top of the bag to the rear head restraints, as
well as attaching the clip at the bottom of the bag to
the forward most cargo hook on the load floor.
WARNING!
In a collision, unsecured r ear quarter windows in the
vehicle could cause injury. They could fly around in a
sudden stop or rough terrain and strike someone in
the vehicle. Do not store the rear quarter windows in
the vehicle without securing them as instructed here.
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) re moved as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's
interior.
•
Careless handling a nd storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
•
The door fra me(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installati on can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx screws located on the
underside of each door frame (two per door).
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by
pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by an internal mechanism.
Step Two
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
Step Three
Door Frame Screw Locations
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame (four door
models).
WARNING!
•
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) re moved as you will lose the protec-
tion that t hey can provide. This procedure is fur-
nished for use during off-road operation only.
•
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR
DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal
at the top of the wi ndshi eld , and line up the holes
for the Torx head scr ews (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being care-
ful not to cross-thread the screws or overti ghten.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail screws.
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
Step Three
Step Three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
2
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body sid e, just behind the rear door opening.
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear of the front door rai l, making sure rubber seals
lie flat. Ensur e the seals are installed correctly to
avoid water leaks.
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being care-
ful not to cross-thread the screws or overti ghten.
Refer to the previous table for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail screws.
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION TWO
DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal
at the top of the wi ndshi eld , and line up the holes
for the Torx head scr ews (two for each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being care-
ful not to cross-thread the screws or overti ghten.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail screws.
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
Step Four
Position Of Frame Above Door
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
Insert Screws From Below Frame
Step Two
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide some protection in some acci-
dents. The windshi eld also provides some protection
against weather, road debris and intrusion of small
branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can
be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h),
with low range operation preferred if you are driving
off-road with the windshield folded down.
Raise the wi ndshi eld as soon as the task that required
its removal is completed and before you return to
on-road driving. Both you and your passengers should
wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road,
regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded
down.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal i njury:
•
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-
shield down.
•
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
•
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
•
Be sure t hat you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the fold-
ing windshield, wi ndshie ld wipers, side bars, and
all associated hardware and fasteners are cor-
rectly and ti ghtly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers’ protection in some accidents.
•
If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, the
top MUST be lowered, and the door rails must be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, the
Freedom Panels MUST be re moved prior to lower-
ing the windshi eld.
○
Refer to the following instructions for more
information:
•
Soft Top Lowering
page 92
•
Door Frame
page 110
•
Freedom Top Panels
page 102
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the
vehicle’s header seal.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the wind-
shield wiper hex bolts.
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and re move the wiper arms.
Step Two
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
2
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the
windshield.
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in the ir original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the tie-
down bumpers (if equipped).
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down on either side of the hood and
on the windshi eld frame. Tighten the strap to secure
the windshield in place.
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could
result.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor
Protective Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover
that is to be used whenever the windshield is folded
down in order to protect the Adaptive Cruise Cont rol
(ACC)/Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sensor. To
install the cover, follow these instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push o n it so that it cov-
ers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the wind-
shield to the normal position. Store the cover in the
cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens.
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, mod-
ule, and insi de cover, being car efu l not to damage or
scratch the mo du le.
Step Five
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
Step Six
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered positi on.
2. Raise the windshield.
3.
Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, reinstall the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the wind-
shield. Secure t hem until they are snug, being careful
not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the pro-
vided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the
blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while hold-
ing the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and
tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten.
Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex
bolts and push gently until they snap into place.
6. After completing the previous steps:
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, rein-
stall the Door Rails and raise the top.
○
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, rein-
stall the Freedom Panels.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
WARNING!
For PHEV models: Always place the ignition in the OFF
position before opening the hood. If the ignition is in
the RUN position and the Propulsion System is active
when the hood is opened, the engine could automati-
cally start, and persons not clear of the vehicle could
be injured by the engine’s moving parts.
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Raise the ho od slightly, and place a hand palm-side
down in the center of the hood opening. Locate the
safety latch in the middle, and push the latch to the
right to open.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
Step Five
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
Hood Latch Locations
Place Hand In Hood Opening
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
2
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert it
into the radiator crossmember.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
•
For PHEV models: If the vehicle was act ively charg-
ing the high voltage battery when the hood was
opened, the vehicle will stop charging until the hood
is closed.
•
For PHEV models:Electric drive mode will not be
available while the hood is open. A message will
show in the instrument cluster display to alert the
driver.
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the slot
and replace i t on the hood panel retaining clip. Lower
the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
NOTE:
For PHEV models: If the vehicle stopped charging the
high voltage battery when the hood was opened, the
vehicle will resume charging when the hood closes.
WARNING!
Be sure t he hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using one of
the following methods:
•
Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if equipped)
•
Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
•
Power door unlock switch on the front doors
(if equipped)
•
Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
To open the swing gate, pull on the handle.
NOTE:
Close the re ar flip-up window before attempting to close
the swing gate (hard top models only).
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up
window closed when you are operating the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear
flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result.
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may require
cleaning if a squeak can be heard when opening the
swing gate. Progressive accumulation of dirt or debris
on the check strap arm may cause failure of the check
strap, requiring replacement. For further information on
vehicle cleaning procedures, see
page 337.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
Swing Gate Handle
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The cargo tie-d owns, located on the cargo area floor,
should be use d to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for chi ld seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo spac e is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label atta ched to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY.
The load carri ed on the roof, when equipped with a lug-
gage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be
uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an au thor ized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on
the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secu re d to the roof r ack,
crossbars, or the roof it self can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof or
roof rack.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops (Four Door Models)
Cargo Tie-Down Loops (Two Door Models)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11 7
2
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and appropriately secure the load and any protec-
tive layer placed between the load and the roof
surface.
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be sec ure d to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is r ec-
ommended to not carry large flat loads, such as
wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
•
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if nee de d. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms wit h the tie loops. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
119
3
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Scan me
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
2. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any read ing within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating s ati sfactorily.
○
The pointer will li kely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when dr ivi ng in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or whe n towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boili ng cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an au thor ized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air cond it io ner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, tur n the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 124.
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
filler door is located.
5. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PHEV Only
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS — PHEV ONLY
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
○
This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go traf-
fic. If the red Warning Light turns on while driv -
ing, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and turn
off the engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle until
the cause i s corrected.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boili ng cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an au thor ized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air cond it io ner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, tur n the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display. When the appropriate condi-
tions exist, this display shows messages
page 124.
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignitio n is in the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is lo cated.
5. Power/Charge Gauge
○
This gauge repres ents the source of the power
utilized to accelerate the vehicle. The green
outer ring represents the High Voltage (HV) bat-
tery output during acceleration, and input power
during regeneration. The yellow inner ring repre-
sents the engi ne output power.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an inst rume nt cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition i n the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door
will activate the display for viewing, and d is play the total
miles, or kilome ters, in the odome ter. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to d isplay important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how systems
are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You
can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
of the instr ume nt cluster.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•
Left Arrow Button
Push and relea se the left
arrow button to
access the i nformation screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
•
Up Arrow Button
Push and relea se the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
•
Right Arrow Button
Push and relea se the right
arrow button to
access the i nformation screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
•
Down Arrow Button
Push and relea se the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
•
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu sc ree ns of a Main Menu
item. Push and ho ld the OK arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features that
can be rese t.
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon —
PHEV Only
This warning will be displayed on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operati ona l
issue will occu r shortly, which will cause the vehicle's pro-
pulsion system to turn off. If the light turns on while driv-
ing, stop the vehicle in a safe loca tio n as soon as pos-
sible. Have the vehicle transported to an authorized
dealer.
•
This message will be displayed continuously
•
Cannot be cleared with button press
•
A single chime will sound
Instrument Cluster Display Location
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon Warning Message
124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As
Soon As Possible — PHEV Only
A warning will appear on the instrument panel display if
the system detects the high voltage battery has over-
heated. This can re sult in a vehicle fire, and the release
of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce the risk of a
larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage propulsion system
will turn off within thirty seconds of displaying this
warning. At that time, the vehicle may not acce ler ate.
You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
Stop and park the vehicle in an open area.Haveall
passengers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and
move to a safe distance away from the vehicle. After all
passengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately.
Even if you do not see flames, a fire may start at any
moment, so do not attempt to re-enter or start the
vehicle.
•
This message will be displayed continuously.
•
Cannot be cleared with a button press.
•
A continuous and rapid chi me will sound.
CAUTION!
If the instru ment cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, d o not reset the service indicator wit hou t
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
CAUTION!
•
An overheated High Voltage Battery may result in
electrical systems damage. Do not attempt to restart
the vehicle. The vehicle must be towed to an autho-
rized dealer.
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system. The
“Oil Change Required” message will dis-
play in the instrument cluster display for
five seconds after a single chime has
sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, t his message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the schedule d maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets
to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indic ator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As Soon As Possible
Warning Message
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
3
ELECTRIC MODE TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If Electric Dr ive mode is unavailable, the reason will
display for five seconds at start up. If your check engine
light comes on, see an authorized dealer immediately.
See the following information for the most common
reasons that the Electric mode would be unavailable:
Operator Choices that can inhibit Electric mode
•
Transmission in Manual Shift mode - Shift to Drive
to use Electric mode.
•
Heavily depressed accelerator pedal position,
requesting high power demand - Beyond the limits
of the ele ctr ic drivetrain, will cause engine to run,
enabling the powertrain to produce its full combined
power available in Hybrid mode.
•
Sustained high spe ed operation i n Electric mode -
Using the engine is more efficient for high speeds
than Electric drive.
•
Transfer case and drive mode selection - eSave
mode almost a lways runs the engine. Hybrid mode,
in 4WD Low, will also r un the engine.
•
Electric range is depleted - You need to recharge to
enjoy Electric mode, or you can continue normally in
Hybrid.
•
Hood open (or a hood switch fault) - This is to pre-
vent unexpected engine starts with the hood open.
Thermal Protection that can inhibit Electric mode
•
Engine, transmission or engine starting belt too
cold - Some systems require warm up to function
properly if the ou tsid e temperature is below 32°F
(15°F in Electric Drive mode).
•
Electric cabin heating capacity li mit s (or electric
cabin heater fault) - Unlike Battery Electric Vehicles
(BEV's), the PHEV Wrangler can warm the cabin
more efficiently with engine heat when operating
below 15°F outside temperature.
•
HV battery, motors or contactors over temperature -
This is a temporary hardware protection feature.
Vehicle performance will resume once protection is
no longer required. If the vehicle performance is
accompanied with a Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
, have the vehicle serviced at an autho-
rized dealership.
Component Protection that can inhibit Electric mode
•
HV battery undervoltage - Sustained EV operation at
high speed, espe cially with aftermarket wheels and
tires, can i ndu ce this.
•
Other electric propulsion system faults indicated by
a MIL - Please bring the vehicle to your dealership
for service.
•
Fuel And Oil Refresh mode - See the following
section.
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode
Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for extended
periods of time without running the gas engine, the fuel
within the vehicle’s fuel tank can become stale or the
engine oil’s lu bric ati ng properties can be reduced. To
prevent engine and/or fuel system damage due to stale
fuel, as well as maintaining internal engine lubrication,
this vehicle is equipped with a Fuel a nd Oil Refresh
mode.
The vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode to minimize potential for stale fuel, and
to ensure lubrication of internal engine components.
When operating in this mode, the gas engine will run to
provide vehicle propulsion (electric only operation is
inhibited). A message will be displayed in t he instru-
ment cluster whenever Fuel and Oil Refresh mode is
active.
The vehicle will automatically exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode when fuel and lu bric ati on conditions
have been satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode, due to fuel which has been in the f uel
tank for a long period of time (becoming stale fuel), the
Electric Mode Temporarily Unavailable Message
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode Message
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
engine will run whenever the vehicle is operational (no
electric only operation) until the low fuel level warning is
activated. It is also possible to exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh mode sooner by adding a minimum of four gal-
lons (15 Liters) of new fuel to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
NOTE:
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh mode to main-
tain engine lu bric ati on, adding fuel will not exit the
mode sooner.
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh mode to main-
tain engine lu bric ati on properties, the engine may run
for a period of up to 2.5 hours when fully warm when-
ever the vehicle is operational (no electric only opera-
tion). If the vehicle is shut down before conditions to
exit the refresh mode have been satisfied, t he engine
may run for additional time on subsequent trips. Oil
refresh may take significantly longer in freezing
temperatures.
NOTE:
•
Frequent short trips at low ambient temperature
conditions where the engine does not reach normal
operating temperatures are more likely to trigger the
lubrication based mode.
•
Electric drive mode will be temporarily unavailable
while the Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode (FORM) is
active. Do not attempt to return to Electric Mode
until the FORM cycle is complete.
CAUTION!
If the instru ment cluster instructs you to change the
engine oil, d o not reset the service indicator wit hou t
changing the oil. Engine damage may result.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
•
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu-
minate in black u nder normal condit io ns, yellow for
noncritical warnings and red for critical warnings
•
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is
shown here
•
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
•
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
•
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
•
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages and warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, thi s type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most o f the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the c ondi ti on that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure”.
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle wit h the lights on).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages de al primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples o f this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Pres s Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start”.
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, thi s type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. An example of this message type is
“Automatic High Beams On”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
3
Messages include the following, but not limited to:
NOTE:
Certain messages may require dealer service.
Front Seat Belts Unbuc kled Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Fuel Low Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Passenger Seat B elt Unbuckled Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Shifter
Traction Control Off Service Electronic Throttle Control Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid Low Service Power Steering Service Tire Pressure System
Oil Pressure Low Cruise Off Park Brake Engaged
Oil Level Low – If Equipped Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temperature Hot Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Audio
Off Road Trip Info Messages
Screen Setup
Phone Call
Status —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The instrument cluster menu items display in the center
of the instr ume nt cluster. Menu items may vary depend-
ing on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the infor-
mation submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Tire Pressure
Coolant
Temperature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature Oil Pressure Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Single Gauge
Submenu —
If Equipped
Critical Level
Logic —
If Equipped
Off Road
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and release the left
or
right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
•
Drivetrain
○ Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front
wheel angle from the steering wheel ori ent ati on.
○ Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only dur ing 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
○ Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped): dis-
plays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with
text message (connected or disconnected).
•
Pitch And Roll
○ Displays the pitch a nd roll of the vehicle in the
graphic with the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the
pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers,
and the graphic will be greyed out. A message indicat-
ing the necessa ry speed for the feature to become
available will also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the statu s of the ACC
systems.
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Dr iver Assist menu is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system st atu s.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instru-
ment cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the
steering wheel), and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occu rs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five se co nds of no ACC display
activity
page 173.
Fuel Economy
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to
reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle left
or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
•
Range – The display shows the estimated di sta nce
(mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remain-
ing in the tank. When the Range value is less than
10 miles (16 kilometers), the Range display will
change to a “LOW” message. Adding a significant
amount of fu el to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW”
message and a new Range value will display. Range
cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes i n driving style or vehicle load -
ing will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
•
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last
reset.
•
Current – This display shows the curre nt fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
Energy Economy — If Equipped
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until Energy Eco nomy is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the left
or right arrow but-
ton to scroll through the following information
submenus:
•
Average Energy Economy gauge + value (hold OK to
reset)
•
Current Energy Economy gauge + value
•
Total Range
Hybrid Info
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until Hybrid Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the following information submenus:
Range to Empty
•
Electric Range
•
Hybrid Range
•
Total Range
Efficiency Coach
Efficiency Coach will monitor your current driving to
help you drive as eff ici ent as possible.
•
“Accel” is based on amount of acceleration (Differ-
ent from MPG).
○ The gauge will only move up when accelerator
pedal is pushed (or accelerati ng with Cruise Con-
trol or ACC).
○ Above a certain rate of change will be considered
inefficient.
○ The color of the gauge bar wi ll change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
“Brake” is based on amount of deceleration (slow-
ing down).
○
The gauge will only move down when brake pedal is
pushed (or dece lera ting with Cruise Control or ACC).
○ The color of the gauge bar wi ll change from green
to yellow to orange.
•
The gauge bar color will transition smoothly up and
down, and have a gradual change based on efficiency.
○ Center of gauge is 0% Accel and 0% Brake.
○ +/-0-35% of gau ge fills green, +/-36-80% yellow,
and +/-81-100% orange (with a blend between
each color).
Efficiency Coach Gauge
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Charge/Power
•
Charging is repres ented by the gauge filling on the
left hand side.
•
Power is represented by the gauge filling on the
right hand sid e.
E-Drive Mode
•
Hybrid automatically adapts for most efficient driving.
•
Electric mode saves fuel for later use.
•
e-Save mode saves battery for later use.
Trip Info
GASOLINE
Push and relea se the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the left
or
right
arrow button to sele ct Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
•
Distance
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
PHEV ONLY
Push and relea se the up or down arrow button
until Trip Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left
or right arrow button to
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Trip A
•
Distance Electric
•
Distance Hybrid
•
Distance Total
•
Average Energy Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Trip B
•
Distance Electric
•
Distance Hybrid
•
Distance Total
•
Average Energy Economy
•
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Messages
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Me ssages Menu item is highlighted. This fea-
ture shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, a “No Stored Mes-
sages” will display.
Screen Setup
Push and relea se the up
or down arrow button
until the Scr ee n Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the scre en as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that infor-
mation is di splayed.
NOTE:
Based upon e quipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
Charge/Power Gauge
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
3
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left and Right
None
Current MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Average MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Outside Temp Compass Trip A Distance
Range To Empty Time Trip B Distance
Center
None Compass Time
Outside Temp
Average MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Trip A Distance
Range to Empty Audio Speedometer
Current MPG
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Trip B Distance Menu Title
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Stop/Start Vehicle Info
Off Road –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Messages
Driver Assist –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Screen Setup
Trip Info
(Show/Hide)
Audio
(show/hide)
Gear Display — If Equipped
•
Full
•
Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
•
On
•
Off
Odometer — If Equipped
•
Show
•
Hide
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
•
Cancel
•
Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instru-
ment cluster display.
Phone Call Status — If Equipped
A pop-up message for an incoming call will appear on
any screen within your instrument cluster. The pop-up
message will appear on your screen until it is cleared
out of the call is ignored, answered, or the calling ends.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Sett ings can be programmed to turn t he
pop-up off. This will not affect the audio menu or any
phone status i nformation
page 201.
Any incoming calls, active ca lls, and outgoing calls will
take the place of your audio information.
A caller’s name will only be displayed if:
•
A number is associated with the call. The phone num-
ber will be displayed in place of the caller’s name.
•
The test/font of the name is not supported by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster will not
display anything in place of the name.
•
The caller’s name exceeds the maximum number of
characters. The last t wo to three digits that will fit
will be replaced with “...”.
NOTE:
Any audio information will return to the instru ment clus-
ter once the call has ended.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and stat us of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditio ns are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving t ime and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-es senti al
electrical loads.
Load reduction is only a cti ve when the e ngine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load redu cti on is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages ind ica te t he vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate tha t the charging system cannot sustain.
132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from loa d
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continu ou sly.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 134.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions whi ch can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
150W Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of the charg-
ing system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
•
Installing options li ke additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently re placed and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game co nsoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a tri p:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and par king time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is sti ll present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern
did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications ar e
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system che ck menu may appear dif fer-
ent based upo n equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is not
on during sta rtup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible .
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
3
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the flu id level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Br ake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been cor re cted. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning L ight, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped be low a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF po sit io n to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition swit ch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a re lated component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 167.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety r isk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as s oo n as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are presse d at the same time.
If the light continues to f lash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engi ne coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sou nd for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 277.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service
Warning Light — PHEV Only
This warning light will illuminate when ser-
vice to the hybrid electric system is needed.
It will be accompanied by a "Service Hybrid
Electric Vehicle System" message in the clus-
ter. If the telltale stays on or continues to come on, con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a
chime will sou nd, to indicate low engine oil
pressure. If t he light and chime turn on while
driving, safely stop the vehicle and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. After the vehicle is
safely stopped, restart the engine and monitor the Oil
Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning
Light is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer for further assistance. Do not
operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the
light is no longer illuminated, the engine can be oper-
ated but it is recommended to take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oi l temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as s oon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Plug Status Fault Warning Light — PHEV
Only
This warning light will illuminate when a plug
status fault is detected (when vehicle not in
motion). It will be accompanied by a cluster
message indicating the type of fault. You
may receive one of the following messages if a fault is
detected:
•
“Service Charging System” – If you see this mes-
sage, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an iss ue
continues, contact an authorized dealer to service
your high voltage charging system.
•
“Issue Detected Check External Charging Station” –
If you see this message, the charging station might
be powered off, have an internal fault or be sched-
uled to charge later. It i s recommended to try a dif-
ferent charging station. If an issue continues, then
contact an aut hor ized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Older or no n-co mpliant J1772 EVSE models may not
support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle d oe s
not charge, it may be connected to a non-compliant
Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators. Please iden-
tify this failure to the site operator and/or EVSE
provider.
•
Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
3
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger se at belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition i s first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light
will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt remains unbuckle d, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or re main on continuou sly and
a chime will sound
page 239.
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Torque Limited Warning Light —
PHEV Only
This warning light illuminates when vehicle
acceleration is limited due to a reduction in
engine or e lect ric motor performance. Con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer for service if illumi-
nation persists.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may con-
tinue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire. If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
“CLUTCH HOT” message is displayed, or the Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
“CLUTCH HOT” message is displayed, or the Transmis-
sion Temperate Warning Light is illuminated, you
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause severe
clutch damage, t ransmi ssio n damage, or failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the Vehicle Secu-
rity system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti -Lo ck portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes o n continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been dri ven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as so on as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and co rre cted.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is norma l; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inact ive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there i s a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illu minates,
take it to an author ized dealer and have
them inspect i t.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler c ap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the light
does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sou nd. The light will remain on
until fuel i s added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
page 288.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving style s. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
(Continued)
WARNING!
you drive slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in d eat h or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also co uld affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not oper-
ating and need s service
page 173.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
3
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an au tho ri zed dealer for ser-
vice
page 234.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
in the sway bar disconnect system
page 159.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In t hese cases, optimal tire durat io n and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tire s be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized de aler as soon
as possible.
Each tire, i nclud ing the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to t he inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or mor e of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire t re ad life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a subst itu te for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illuminati on of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one o r more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to indicate a TSR
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
light remains o n after restarting the engine.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode, and
the front and rea r driveshafts are mechani-
cally locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed . Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
page 154.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Four-Wheel Drive part time mode, and
the front and rea r driveshafts are mechani-
cally locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indica tes when the front and/or
rear axle lo cker fault has been detected.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
page 234.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indica tes when the front, rear, or
both axles have been locked. The telltale will
display the lock icon on the front and rear
axles to indicate the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Neutr al mode.
Off Road+ Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Off
Road+ has been activated.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indica tes whe n the rear axle lock
has been activated
page 154.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected
page 159.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and the re is no vehicle
in front detected
page 173.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
page 173.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
3
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Four-Wheel Drive auto mode. The sys-
tem will provide power to all four wheels and
shift the power between the front and rear
axles as need ed. This will provide maximum traction in
dry and slippery conditi ons.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
page 171.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
page 70.
Max Regeneration Indicator Light —
PHEV Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and capable.
When the switch is pressed, the following
instrument cluster messages will be seen:
•
“Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
•
“Max Regeneration Off” – appears when t he feature
is turned off.
•
“Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when
the feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
page 19.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Plug Status Indicator Light — PHEV Only
When plugged in, the green plug indicator
light will illumina te i f the Electric Vehicle
Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging plug is
securely attached to the charging por t. This
indicates that the plug is detected, but doesn't mean it
is charging. It will be accompanied with a cluster mes-
sage indicating the charge stat us:
•
“Plugged In And Charging”
•
“Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set
Schedule”
•
“Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light — PHEV
Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the
vehicle.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is i n “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn si gnal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunct ion lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sou nd if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative out sid e light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the Two-Wheel Drive High mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when
the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position
and the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If
these conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
Max Regeneration Indicator Light —
PHEV Only
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and not ready.
When the switch is pressed, the following
instrument cluster messages will be seen:
•
“Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
•
“Max Regeneration Off” – appears when t he feature
is turned off.
•
“Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when
the feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
page 19.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensur e
the vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the but-
ton on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Con-
trol has been tur ned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
"flash to pass" scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Con-
trol has been tur ned on, but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent perfor-
mance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulatio ns.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn o n the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 14 1
3
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible .
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It could
also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occu r. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the perfor-
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized service
technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle
and emissions system
page 201.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order
to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connecti on port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○
Be possible tha t vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localit ie s, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection o f your vehicle's emissions control sys-
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is function-
ing and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the igni ti on switch to the ON positio n, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seco nds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see a n
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then ind icate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system i s
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and ou tsi de mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a locatio n accessible to children. A child could
operate power wi ndows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition sys tem. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is presse d to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start
regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The 4L Indicator Light will illumi-
nate when the transfer case has been shifted i nto this
mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle wit h the gear selector in t he PARK
position (vehicle can also be started i n NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine pri or to
the engine st arting, push the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, t he transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off while the
ignition will r emai n in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
position). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/
STOP button once will turn the engine off. The igni-
tion will re main in the ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or thr ee short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC posi-
tion (NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned
off when the transmission is not in PARK.
143
4
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition
will cycle to the OFF position after 30 minutes of inac-
tivity if t he ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmi ssi on is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the dri ver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
•
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument clu ster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
•
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the dri ver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Ignition is swi tche d from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the i gniti on switch will change to ACC
position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
•
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
•
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the dri ver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
•
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “ AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instr ume nt cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “ Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will be displayed in the instrument c luster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added pre-
caution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle
in 4L.
The message “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
•
Vehicle is not in PARK
•
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be di s-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release
it when the engine starts. For vehicles equipped
with the ENGINE START/STOP button, press and
hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after following the “Normal
Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not experi-
enced an extended park condition, as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the
engine for no more than 10 to 15 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engi ne is flooded.
Leave the ignition in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a di schar ged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
page 274.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 to 15 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
STARTING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
(IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF posi-
tion, key fob i s removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number o f
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a locatio n accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Activate the Propulsion System Active (PSA) or Ready to
Drive mode with the gear selector in the PARK (P) posi-
tion. Apply the brake before shif t ing to any driving
range.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
page 16.
NOTE:
If the igniti on switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situ ati on, a back-up method can be used to oper-
ate the ignition switch. Put the key fob against the
ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
NORMAL STARTING
Achieving vehicle READY using the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is in Ready to Drive
mode, which may include the start of the engine
depending on co ndi ti ons such as battery state of
charge and engine temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch by providing three positions: OFF, ACC
and ON/RUN. To change the ignition position without
starting the vehicle (to power ce rtain accessories), fol-
low these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once, without
the brake pedal being pressed, to place the ignition
in the ACC position (instrument cluster will display
“ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time, without the brake pedal being pressed, to
place the ignit io n in the ON/RUN position (instru-
ment cluster will display “Ignition or Accessory On”).
NOTE:
The vehicle is not able to be driven in the Ignition or
Accessory On position, see “Achieving vehicle READY
using the ENGINE START/STOP button” previously
defined in this section for further information.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time,
without the brake pedal being pressed, to return the
ignition to the OFF position (instrument cluster will
display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque per formance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 124.
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
AFTER STARTING
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will automati-
cally control engine o perat io n.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed, the instrument clus-
ter display will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” mes-
sage, and the vehicle will remain running.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed continuously
for at least two seconds (or thr ee short pushes in a
row), the vehicle ignition will exit the Ready mode
and enter Accessory mode. Never leave a vehicle
out of the PARK posi tio n, or it could roll.
NOTE:
•
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut-
down feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state
(vehicle running) with the gear selector in PARK for
30 minutes, the vehicle will automatically turn itself
off.
•
The vehicle provides automatic notification using a
three horn chirp alert, cluster chiming, and a cluster
message (“Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle”) if the
vehicle was not turned off (still “Ready to Drive”)
and a valid key fob for the vehicle is not detected
within the passe nger cabin, following the opening
and closing of any passenger compartment doo r
(requires all doors to be closed before the key fob
check will occur ). These automatic alerts are to
remind the driver to turn off the vehicle before leav-
ing it, as well as, to let the driver know that the vehi-
cle's key fob may have been unintentionally
removed from the vehicle by an exiting passenger.
After providing the horn chirp alert, additional auto
chirps will be inhibited until the gear se lector has
been moved out of PARK or ignition cycled.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desir able.
While cruising, br ie f full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of loca l traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear c an be detri-
mental and shou ld be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 346.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
6.4L ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
This breaking in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil
change interval.
It is recomme nde d for the operator to observe the fol-
lowing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
•
Do not allow the engine to operate a t idle for an
extended period of time.
•
Press the acce ler ator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
•
Avoid aggressive braking.
•
Drive with the engine speed below 3,500 RPM.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 14 7
4
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
•
Press the acce ler ator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).
•
Avoid aggressive braking.
•
Drive with the engine speed below 5,000 RPM.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
•
Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting manu-
ally (paddles or gear shift) at higher R PMs when
possible.
•
Do not perform sustained oper ati on with the accel-
erator pedal at wide open throttle.
•
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
•
Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or si milar activities.
NOTE:
Check engine oi l with every refueling and add if neces-
sary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through
the first oi l change interval. Running the engine with an
oil level below the add mark can cause severe engine
damage.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure tha t the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an auto-
matic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash if vehicle speed is detected. A chime will sound
if the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It doe s not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reaso ns. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a locatio n accessible to children. A child could
operate power wi ndows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
Parking Brake Lever
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause d amage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE
or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
•
Never drive with your foot resting on or partially
depressing the clutch pedal. Never attempt to hold
the vehicle on a hill wi th the clutch pedal partially
engaged. Operating vehicle in this manner may
(Continued)
CAUTION!
cause the c lut ch to overheat and cause permanent
damage to the clutch. If you continue to operate
the vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT” mes-
sage or Transmission Temperature Warning Light
will be displayed in the instrument c luster. For
more information
page 133.
•
Do not drive with your hand rest ing on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, over
time could lead to premature wear of the gearbox
internal components.
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the t ransmi ssi on fluid warms up.
This is normal.
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear sele ctor into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed
on the handle of the selector). The engage d gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position,
lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move
the gear sele ctor all the way left and then forward.
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelera-
tor pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is nor-
mal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clut ch engaged
(clutch pedal rele ase d), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission effi cie ntly for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted
as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Transmission Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-
mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep
hills. In additi on, downshifting at the right time provides
better acceleration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmis sio n shift system is equipped with
gear blockers, which will prevent downshifts into FIRST
or SECOND gear above certai n vehicle speeds.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional e ngine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
•
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with the clutch pedal pressed may result in damage
to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clu tch may result in engine damage.
•
When descending a hill, be very careful to down-
shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding
the engine whic h can cause engine damage,
and/or clutch d amage, even if the c lutc h pedal is
pressed. If tr ansfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are
significantly lower.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine dam-
age and/or damage the clutch, even if the clut ch
pedal is presse d.
•
Descending a hill in low range with the clutch
pedal pressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift
Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage t he clutch disc, even if the clutc h
pedal is presse d.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preced ing chart are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parki ng brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
•
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shi fting to PARK, and verify
that the tr ansmiss ion gear position indicator sol-
idly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine spee d is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reaso ns. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear s ele ctor.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a locatio n accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power wind ows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressi ng the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the dri ver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing t he transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission i n PARK whenever the igni-
tion is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the igni-
tion is in the ACC position (even thou gh the engine will
be off). Ensure that the t ransmi ssi on is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF (not i n ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be presse d. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for nor-
mal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual tr ansmis sio n gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indica tor
will blink continu ou sly until the selector is returned to
the proper position, or the re quested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions. The transmission elec-
tronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shif t s
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shif ts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector for-
ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position (beside the DRIVE posi ti on) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instr ume nt cluster
page 154.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward),
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the i nstr ument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into t he DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplement s the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn t he front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
•
Apply the parking brake.
•
Shift the transmission into PARK.
•
Turn the ignit io n OFF.
•
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the d ri vetrain.
Transmission Gear Selector
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selec tor and firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the transmission gea r position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is stand ing for pro-
longed periods with the e ngine running. Apply the park-
ing brake and shift t he transmission into PARK if you
must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
•
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
For Recreational Towing
page 193.
•
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 280.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position should be use d for all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating t he vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower ge ar
page 154. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on e ngine and transmissio n temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
once the tr ansmis sio n temperature has risen to a suit-
able level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables fu ll manual control of transmission shift-
ing also known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmis-
sion gear, and will display the cu rre nt gear in the instru-
ment cluster
page 154.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a cond it io n is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in certain gears, or may not
shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restar ted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instru-
ment cluster will inform the driver of the more serio us
conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
•
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
•
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer
has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of
your transmission.
•
If the transmi ssi on cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmiss ion into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer de tected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, co ld slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situ ati ons.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) positi on (beside the DRIVE position) or
tap one of the paddle shifters (if equipped) on the
steering wheel. The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode ,
you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position)
or the paddle shifters (if equipped) to manually shift the
transmission.
AutoStick mode has the following operati onal benefits:
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a
stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out
in SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Holding the ge ar selector or paddle shifter
(if equipped) in the (-) position will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the cur-
rent speed.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•
The system may revert to au tomatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control
(if equipped) is enabled AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift
paddle (if equipped) (and the gear selector is already in
DRIVE) until “D” is once again indicated in the instru-
ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional e ngine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision o r
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause tra nsfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters (If Equipped)
1 — (-) Paddle Shifter
2 — (+) Paddle Shifter
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
IF EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four positions:
•
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
•
4H — Four-Wheel Drive High Range
•
N (Neutral)
•
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery road sur-
faces only.
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured o r killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disen-
gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the pow-
ertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
page 193.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed . This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulli ng power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such
as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock
the front and re ar driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear whee ls to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positio ns are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driv-
ing in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads
will cause incr eas ed tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. For further information on shifting
into4Hor4L
page 155.
The instrument cluster alert s the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for Rubi-
con models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires o f equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shi fting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentar ily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do not acceler-
ate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
NOTE:
•
Do not attempt to make a shi ft while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shift-
ing while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can
cause damage to the transfer case.
•
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low o r uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
•
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the t ransfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clut ch pedal on a manual transmission. While
the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do
not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once
the shift is completed, place the automatic transmis-
sion into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, dif fi cu lty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the t ransfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a tr ansfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
IF EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
•
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
•
4H AUTO — Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range
•
4H PART TIME — Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range
•
N (Neutral)
•
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case mode position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road
conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time Hi gh Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaf t , forcing the
front and rear whe els to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured o r killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disen-
gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the pow-
ertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
page 193.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed . This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulli ng power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive position
(4H AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on
dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is
engaged, this mod e will result in lower fuel economy
than the 2H mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock
the front and re ar driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear whee ls to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positio ns are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driv-
ing in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads
will cause incr eas ed tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. For further information on shifting
into4Hor4L
page 157.
The instrument cluster alert s the driver that the vehicle
is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. The light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed
will be approximately three times (four times for Rubi-
con models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires o f equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shi fting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentar ily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do not acceler-
ate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The pre-
ferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you moment ari ly release
the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a con-
stant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
•
Do not attempt to make a shi ft while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shift-
ing while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can
cause damage to the transfer case.
•
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low o r uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
•
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the t ransfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shi ft an auto-
matic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph
(2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the
shift is completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clu tch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, dif fi cu lty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is
with the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the
vehicle moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a tr ansfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE —
IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by
the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction dif-
fers bet ween the two rear wheels, the differential auto-
matically proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface,
a slight applicatio n of the accelerator will supply maxi-
mum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on t he ground and cause you to lose con-
trol of your vehicle.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
REAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of t he steering column).
This feature will only activate when the following condi-
tions are met:
•
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L.
•
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Vehicle speed should be 16 km/h (10 mph) or less.
Vehicle speed should be 16 km/h or less.
•
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will
illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle
and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate).
When the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of
switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully
locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of
4L, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 48 km/h
(30 mph), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 16 km/h (10 mph).
The axle lock disengages at speeds above 48 km/h,
and will automatically re-lock once vehicle speed is less
than 16 km/h.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper condi-
tions are met.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of t he steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
This feature will only activate when the following condi-
tions are met:
•
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H.
•
The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
page 160.
•
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
page 226.
•
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or
tight cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of
4H, Off Road+ is turned off by the driver, ESC “Full Off”
is exited, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle i s fully
locked or unlocked.
The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily disengage
the rear lo cker under some conditions.
If this occur s, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as
soon as the system allows.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR
DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon-
necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is cont rolled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
steering column).
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The Sway
Bar Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster)
will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The Sway
Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition,
or when acti vation conditions are not met. The
stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode dur-
ing normal dri ving conditions.
WARNING!
Ensure the s tabili zer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer /sway
bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control,
which could r esu lt in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle
control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will
attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing or soli d Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return to off-
road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-
road position
page 154. The Sway Bar Indicator
Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has be en
fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to
left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
tion is du e to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the
bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that
the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from
side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
Axle Lock Switch Panel
SWAY BAR Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
WARNING!
If the stabili zer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
When activated, Off Road+ is designe d to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the OFF ROAD+
switch in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance
will improve depending on which Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) mode is activated.
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not functi on in 2H mode. If the button is
pushed while i n 2H mode, the cluster display will show
the message “Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features will
activate:
•
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster display
•
A mode-specific message will di splay the instrument
cluster display
•
Off-Road Pages will launch on the radio head-unit if
selected in radio settings
•
The TrailCam System (forward facing camera) will
launch if sele cted in radio settings
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave in
different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The
following enhancements will occur when using Off
Road+.
4L
•
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule
when rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to
de-gain and low range, operates at lower vehicle
speeds
•
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
•
Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
•
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved s and
performance/wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
•
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
•
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited
speed
•
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition
cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will
not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster
message will display indicating this if either feature is
activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the
following will occur on the vehicle:
•
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will
turn off, but Stability Control will remain active.
•
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Co ntrol will turn off.
TORQUE RESERVE — 6.4L (IF EQUIPPED)
Torque Reserve is automatically enabled while staging
a brake-torque launch, to reduc e the time required for
the intake system to fill wit h air. Torque Reserve pro-
vides greater engine airflow than is otherwise required,
stops fuel flow to multiple cylinders and retards spark
as necessary to hold the torque from the extra airflow
“in reserve”. As soon as the driver launches the vehicle,
fuel flow is restored and spark is advanced to instanta-
neously deliver the reserve torque. For a given launch
engine speed, a ddi ti onal torque is delivered more
quickly than is possible without Torque Reserve.
NOTE:
Due to the way the engine is controlled during Torque
Reserve, a distinct exhaust note is produced and
engine vibration increases.
OFF ROAD+ Switch
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
DUAL MODE EXHAUST —
6.4L (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with a dual-mode exhaust,
designed to provide both quiet cruising and sporty sound.
The system has two modes, Performance Exhaust ON and
Performance Exhaust OFF. A button on the dashboard can
be used to toggle between settings, and the light illumi-
nates when “Performance Exhaust ON” mode is active. In
this mode, the exhaust valves are commanded to deliver a
deep, sporty sound. A message appears momentarily in
the instrument cluster whenever the exhaust mode
changes. When the “Performance Exhaust OFF” setting is
active, the exhaust valves are closed except at high
engine speeds and loads, when they are commanded
open without notification.
The Performance Exhaust is OFF by default; however, if
Performance Exhaust ON is activated by pressing the
exhaust button, this setting will be saved after changing
drive modes and after restarting the engine.
WINCH USAGE — RUBICON
(IF EQUIPPED)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING
YOUR WINCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recov-
ery winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
the winch rope onto the winch drum via plane ta ry gear
reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating
very high forces a nd should be used with care. Do not
operate the winch without reading and understanding
the complete winch owner's manual.
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions listed to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suita ble anchor point.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required
to tension the winch rope.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the
rope while winding the rope. Always use care to
ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the
drum and is neatly wound onto the drum.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
OF YOUR WINCH
1. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator a nd the
winch. The remote control provides the ability to
power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To oper-
ate the winch, t he toggle switch is pushed down to
power the winch in and up to power the winch out.
The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral
(center) position.
2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system.
Dual Mode Exhaust Button
Winch Components
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
3. Remote Socket: The remote socket (underneath
this cap) allows the remote control to be att ached to
the control pack to allow the winch to function.
4. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow
the rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
5. Synthetic Rope/Hook: The synthetic rope with hook
allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to
provide a pulling force. This synthetic rope is highly
flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
6. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the rope to be stored on the winch and trans-
mits force to the rope. The winch is equipped with
an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch
drum if the winch motor is stopped.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the syn-
thetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear pro-
tective gloves while operating the winch or
handling the winch rope. Avoid loose fitting
clothes or anything that could become
entangled in t he rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch's pulling power; and (2)
change your pulling direction without damag-
ing the winch rope. Proper use of the snatch block is
covered in “Before You Pull.”
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a sa fe
means of connec ting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shack-
le's pin is threaded to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of
tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point for the winch
rope to a wide variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protects living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided with
the synthetic rope and must be used with the synthetic
rope at all times to protect the rope from potential abra-
sion wear. The sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily be
positioned along the synthetic rope to protect from
rough surfaces and sharp corners.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
•
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
•
Never use as a hoist.
•
Never use to move persons.
•
Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
capacity.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the synthetic rope.
•
Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in tension
or under load.
•
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, synthetic rope is in tension, or rope drum is
moving.
•
Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load and
keep others away during winching.
•
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the syn-
thetic rope, hook and fairlead opening during
operation and when spooling.
•
Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Always
use a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
•
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
•
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
•
Never use bungee or kinetic straps that develop
tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of
force when stretched.
•
Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
•
Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
synthetic rope around the winch drum.
•
Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, when using re mote
inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some
key points to remembe r when using your winch are:
•
Always take your time to assess the situation and
plan your pull carefully.
•
Always take your time when using a winch.
•
Use the right equipment for the situation.
•
Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the syn-
thetic rope to slip through your hands when han-
dling the rope.
•
Only the operator should handle the synthetic rope
and remote control.
•
Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
•
Always know your winch: Take the ti me to fully read
and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching oper ati on.
•
Always inspect winch installation and synthetic
rope condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged rope must be replaced imme-
diately. Loose or damaged winch installation must
be corrected immediately.
•
Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
•
Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
synthetic rope and rigging.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
•
Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar through
the rollers. Watch and listen to winch for proper
snugness.
•
Never power hook through fairlead. Could cause
damage.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and synthetic rope
for damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is
loose or rope shows excessive wear, frays, or
damage.
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
4. Free the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach
the hook str ap to the ho ok (if not attached).
Winch Rope
Free Spool Lever
Hook Strap
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
WARNING!
•
Never touch winch rope or hook while someone
else is at the control switch or during winching
operation.
•
Never touch winch rope or hook while under ten-
sion or und er load.
5. Pull the synthetic rope to the anchor point. Pull out
enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor point.
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while
you work.
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have estab-
lished your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk pro-
tector or choker-chain around the object.
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is
critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural
anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the
cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are
available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be
sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the
hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor
point that will enable you to pull straight in the direc-
tion the vehicle will move. This allows the synthetic
rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling
drum. An anchor point as far away as possible will
provide the winch with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk Protec-
tor. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap
or chain and through the hook, being careful not to
over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located on the front of the winch. Be careful not to
let the re mote control cord dangle in front of the
winch. If you choose to control the winch from inside
your vehicle, always pass the remote through a win-
dow to avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always
disconnect the remote control when not in use.
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the r emote
control switch, slowly wind the rope until no slack
remains. Once t he rope is under tension, stand
well clear of it and never step over it.
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of d ebri s before continuing with
the winching procedure.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
Tree Trunk Protector
1 — Clevis/D-Shackles
2 — Tree Trunk Protector
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper wind-
ing can cause damage to the synthetic rope.
In certain situations you may decide to throw a
heavy blanket or similar object over the rope. A
heavy blanket can absorb energy should the syn-
thetic rope break. Place it on the rope midway
between the winch and the anchor point. Do this
before the rope is put under tension. Do not
approach or move the blanket once tension is
applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fair-
lead. If it is necessary to move or remove the blan-
ket, slack the tension on the rope first.
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate
vicinity surrounding the winching operation is com-
pletely aware of your intentions before you pull.
Declare where the spectators should not stand —
never behind or in front of the vehicle and never
near the synthetic rope or snatch block. Your situ-
ation may have other "no people" zones.
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the synthet ic rope,
begin winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that
the rope is windi ng evenly and tightly around the
spooling drum. For addi ti onal assistance, the
winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being
pulled by the winch. Continue pulling until t he
vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to drive
the vehicle, the winching operation is complete.
NOTE:
○
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow
the winch motor to cool down.
○
What to look for under load: The synthetic rope
must always spool onto the drum as indicated by
the drum rotation decal on the winch. As you
power-in, make sure the syntheti c rope winds
evenly and tightly on the drum. This prevents the
outer rope wraps from drawing into the inner
wraps, binding and damaging the synthetic rope.
Avoid shock loads by using the control switch
intermittently to take up rope slack. Shock loads
can momentarily far exceed the winch and syn-
thetic rope ratings. During side pulls the syn-
thetic rope tends to stack up at one end of the
drum. This stack can become large enough to
cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up
pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the synthetic rope come s close to the
tie rods or mount ing plate. To fix an uneven
stack, spool out that section of the rope and
reposition it to the opposite end of the drum,
which will free up space for continued winching.
15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes
and shift the transmission to PARK. Release ten-
sion in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect
from the anchor.
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
No People Zones
Using The Remote Control
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person handling
the synthetic rope should walk the rope in and not
let it slid e through the hand, control the winch at
all times.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so i t cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the synthetic rope so i t will not kink or
tangle when spoole d. Be sure any synthetic rope
already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and
evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if
necessary. Keep the synthetic rope und er light ten-
sion and spool the rope back and onto the winch
drum in even layers. Stop frequently to tighten and
straighten the layers as necessary.
Repeat this process until the winch ho ok is the
same distance as the full length of the remote con-
trol from the winch. Pinch the hook between your
thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap.
Hold the ho ok strap between the thumb and forefin-
ger to keep tension on the synthetic rope. Walk the
synthetic rope towards the fairlead, carefully spool-
ing in the remaining rope by puls ing the remote con-
trol switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the
hawse fairlead.
19. Disconnect the re mote control. Disconnect the
remote control cord from the control box and store
in a clean and dry place. Winching operations are
now complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or main-
taining a strai ght-li ne pulling situatio n. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation.
Think “safety” at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
All winching operat io ns should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
synthetic rope collecting on one side of the drum affect-
ing pulling efficiency and damaging synthetic rope. A
snatch block, secur ed to a poi nt directly in front of the
vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction
while still allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to
wind properly onto the spooling drum.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
Hook In Stored Position
Change Pulling Directions
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases
mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.
Double Line
Because pulling power decrease s with the number of
layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you can use
a snatch block to double line out mo re rope. This
decreases the number of layers of synt heti c rope on the
drum, and inc rea ses pulling power. Start by feeding out
enough synthetic rope to free the winch hook. Attach
the hook to your vehicle's frame/tow hook and r un the
rope through a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and,
using the snatch block, pull out enough synthetic rope
to reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to
the mounting ki t. Secure to the anchor point with a tree
trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the clevis/
shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the
strap/chain, being car ef ul not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic
Power Steering system that provides increased vehicle
response and e ase of maneuverability. The system
adapts to different driving conditions. If the Electro-
Hydraulic Power Steering system experiences a fault
that prevents it from providing power steering assist,
then the system will provide mechanical steering
capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system i s
allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a
flashing icon are displayed on the inst ru ment cluster
screen, it i ndi cates that the vehicle needs to be taken
to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance
page 124.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indi-
cates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition
in the power steering system. You will lose power steer-
ing assistance mo ment ari ly until the over temperature
condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the li ght turns off
page 124.
NOTE:
•
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still pos sible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condit ion persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 6.4L
(IF EQUIPPED)
This feature of fers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cyli nder s during light load
operation. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs. It is not available in 4L. There is also a four cylin-
der indicator in the instrument cluster to indicate when
this feature is active.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full func-
tionality after a battery disconnect.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal
or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional e ngine starts. Vehicles
equipped with eTorque contain a heavy-duty motor gen-
erator and an additional hybrid electric battery to store
energy from vehicle deceleration for use on e ngine
startup after a stop as well as providing launch torque
assist.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
NOTE:
It is recomme nde d that Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is
located behind the wheel well for the front passenger
wheel.
AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to completely
de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver igni-
tion start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/
START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 124.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal pressed.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety a nd comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation o f the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start screen. Situations when the engine
will not stop include (but not limited to):
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
Gear selector is in MANUAL (M) mode.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is o pen.
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models Only).
•
ACC is on and speed is set.
•
Vehicle is at high altitude.
•
System fault is present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme co ndi tio ns of
the previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
•
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes.
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “Stop/Star t OFF” message will appear in instru-
ment cluster display within the Stop/Start section, and
the autostop function will be disabled
page 124.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON con-
dition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display
page 124.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs duri ng an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal
will automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional e ngine starts.
Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a heavy duty
motor generator and an ad di tio nal hybrid electric bat-
tery to store energy from vehicle deceleration for use on
engine startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recomme nde d that Stop/Start be disabled during
off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is
located behind the wheel well for the front passenger
wheel.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
4
AUTOSTOP MODE
WARNING!
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to completely
de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver igni-
tion start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY until
you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster
page 124.
•
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
•
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position
and the clutc h pedal must be fully released.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety a nd comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Situations when t he engine will not stop include (but not
limited to):
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C).
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
Battery is discharged.
•
When driving in REVERSE.
•
Hood is o pen.
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
•
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver’s door i s open.
•
Vehicle is at high altitude.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Forward Gear is engaged.
•
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models Only).
•
System fault is present.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme co ndi tio ns of
the previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will
start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not
require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go
into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY mod e until the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start automati-
cally while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
•
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different
than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
•
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
STOP/START OFF swi tch is pressed.
•
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the
instrument cluster
page 124.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/
Start system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling
the ignition switch.
5.
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display
page 124.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs duri ng an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with t he Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
•
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected.
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Cont rol buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
4
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The Cruise Cont rol Set Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. The Cruise Con-
trol Set Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned o ff when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause i t to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the sys-
tem off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Crui se Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired spee d, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, o r decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustme nt. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Crui se Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Cont rol system mai ntai ns speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on mo de rate hills is
normal. On steep hi lls, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so i t may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be us ed at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without eras-
ing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
•
Vehicle parking brake is applied
•
Stability event occurs
•
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
Engine overspeed occurs
•
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
•
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memo ry.
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently if your
vehicle is not equipped with ACC
page 171.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modificat ions to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
page 352.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
and, most importantly, brake o perat io n to ensure
safe ope rat io n of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can re sult
in a collisio n and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully re cognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ On vehicles with an automatic transmission, will
bring the vehicle to a complete stop while follow-
ing a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle for two
seconds in t he stop position. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within two sec-
onds, the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release t he brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
•
You should not utilize the ACC system:
○ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
○ When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
○ When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
○ When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant spee d.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of t he steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system st atu s.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one o f the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
4
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occu rs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five se co nds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the i nstr ume nt cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When in 4WD Low
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
•
When the manual transmission is in FIRST gear
•
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When ESC Full Off mode is active
•
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and relea se the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the inst ru ment cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/of f button again. At this time,
the system will t urn off and t he instrument cluster dis-
play will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You c ould accidentally
set the system or cause i t to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be u sed without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and t he
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cr ui se Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahea d. In addition, the proximity
warning does not acti vate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set whe n the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
17 4 STARTING AND OPERATING
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
ACC system cannot be set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in
FIRST gear.
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set spee d. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set spee d
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the dist ance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock B rake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
•
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
•
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
•
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
•
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
10 seconds (manual transmission only)
•
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual transmission
only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will tu rn off and e rase the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
•
The ignition i s placed in the OFF position
•
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there i s a set speed in the memory, push the RES
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instru ment cluster display will show the last
set speed.
Resume can be u sed at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be u sed at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
•
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes
to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or ser io us personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+),orSET(-) button onc e will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustme nt. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When dri ving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the but-
ton is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by
one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set spe ed . If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC
Set With Target Light. The system will then adjust
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor
•
The distance s et ti ng is changed
•
The system disengages
page 174
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the br akes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximu m braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster d isplay
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capaci ty.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” scre en in the instrument cluster di splay
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
176
STARTING AND OPERATING
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver uti-
lizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill whi le following a target vehicle, your vehicle
will resume motion without the need for any driver
action if t he target vehicle start s moving within two sec-
onds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will
release. A c ancel message will display on the instru-
ment cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is o pened , the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will dis-
play on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be re quired at
this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
(Continued)
WARNING!
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, su ch
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe
Front R adar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can some ti mes be displayed while dr iving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles,
or ice and snow). The ACC system wi ll recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruc tio n. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens wi th a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the senso r lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Do ing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grille s. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malf unct ion.
When the condit io n that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will r et ur n to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and a chime will sou nd
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructio ns,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
4
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an o bstr uct io n.
When the condit io n that created li mited functionality is
no longer pres ent, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
“SERVICE ACC/FCW” WARNING
If the system tu rns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
plays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal sys tem fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see an autho ri zed dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or u nexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to inter-
vene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
Offset Driving Condition Example
ACC Hill Example
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle unt il it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC doe s not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible i ndi cati ons of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). For limitati ons of this
system and recommendations, see
page 182
.
ParkSense will re ta in the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only whe n the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the s ystem will remain active until the vehicle
speed is incre ase d to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become acti ve again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the senso rs’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 124. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
4
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in R EVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the Park Assist ready system status.
The system will i ndi cate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one o r more regions based on the obsta-
cle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the ce nter rear
region and wi ll produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show a single arc moving closer to the vehicle and emit
a fast tone that will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the d isplay will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obst acle , the
display will show the si ngle arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuou s Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid A rc
180
STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when
the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will re du ce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system i s sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSe nse switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the sys tem, t he instrument clu ster display
page 124 will show the “ParkSense Off” message
for approximately five seconds. When the gear selec tor
is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the “ParkSense
Off” message for as long as the vehicle is i n REVERSE
(Not in 4WD Low).
The ParkSense swi tch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will remain on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will act uate a single chime,
once per ignit io n cycle, and it will display the
“ParkSense Unavailable Wiper Rear Sensors” or the
“ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” message.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, t he instru-
ment cluster display will show the “ParkSense Unavail-
able Wiper Rear Sensors” or “ParkSense Unavailable
Service Required” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Unde r this condi ti on, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Wiper Rear Sensors”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an autho rize d
dealer.
If “ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” appears in
the instrument cluster display, see an authorized
dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 18 1
4
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE
SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least
4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
•
Ensure that t he rear fascia/bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, d irt and debris to keep the ParkSense sys-
tem operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter display will read “ParkSense Off.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when i t is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regu larly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can r esu lt in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the Par kSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed wit hin 12 inches (30 cm) of
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense Unavail-
able Service Required” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense . Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, ani mals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and mu st continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in seriou s injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in i njury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle
sounds the co nti nuou s tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is o nly a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is re comme nde d that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen i mage of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into RE VERSE.
The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note
will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle in the center of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect d isplay.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to tu rn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era delay turned off, t he rear Camera mode is exited
and the previous scree n appears again.
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be dis-
played for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen X button to disable display of the Rear
View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen X button, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
•
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image i s made available ONLY whe n the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel position.
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 c m-2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Pa rkV i ew Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must conti nue to pay attention while backi ng up.
Failure to do so can result i n serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camer a is
unable to view every obst acle or object in your
drive path. You remain responsible at all times for
parking safely while using the ParkView camera.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obst acle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera le ns, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front view
of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
When enabled, acti ve dynamic tire lines are projected
on the ground plane of the TrailCam view base d on the
steering wheel position.
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings that
may be selected through the Uconnect system
page 201.
Front View Camera
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
4
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via these methods:
•
Press the FWD Camera button on the cont rols
screen.
•
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
apps menu.
•
Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road Pages.
•
Press the Off Road+ button when “Auto Launch Off
Road+” (if equipped) has been selected under cam-
era settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on t he Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era Delay turned off and TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen
appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Cam-
era Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to dis-
able display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display
timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue
to be displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam
image will be displayed continuously until deacti-
vated via the touchscreen X button, the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF positi on.
•
The touchscreen X button to disable the display of
the camera i mage is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
•
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button lo cated on the
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will
stop when the button is released. In addition, if your
vehicle is equipped with a rear washer system, when
activated, washer fluid will also dispense to wash the
TrailCam.
•
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a
time while ho ldi ng the button.
•
The Clean Camera system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Cap
184
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
○
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
○
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler do or.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation o f most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fu el is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the fuel fi ller cap about a quarter turn unt il
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap
is properly tightened.
•
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every
time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-
tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly inst alled , or damaged. If the system detects
a malfunction, t he “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is hea rd. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to
turn the mess age off. If the problem persists, the mes-
sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This might indica te a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will tu rn the MIL off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
(IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK position.
2. Push the fuel filler door release button (located
below the headlight switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
4
3. Pushing the button will initiate a sequence of events
to depressurize the fuel system. A message will dis-
play in the cluster when the vehicle is ready to be
fueled.
NOTE:
○
After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle; beyond 20 min-
utes you will need to push the release button
again.
○
The fuel doo r should take 15 seconds to open
under normal conditions. It may take longer to
open in some situations, su ch as high ambient
temperatures.
○
If you hear a hissing sound when the fuel cap is
removed, wait to begin fueling the vehicle until
after the hissing sound stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when it
has been release d. To finish opening the fuel door,
manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
○
If the service station fuel pump repeatedly clicks
off (stops delivering fuel) before the fuel tank
has been filled, push the fuel door release but-
ton again.
○
If pushing the fuel door release button a second
time does not correct the problem, try using a
different fuel pump. If premature fuel pump shut-
off continues to be a problem, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
○
If the fuel door does not re-latch upon closure,
push the fuel door rele ase button again to reset
the latch. If pushing the fuel door release button
a second ti me does not correct the problem, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the insi de release button. Do not pry
on the doo r.
5. Remove the fuel filler cap.
6. Insert the nozzle and fill the vehicle with fuel; when
the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
7. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
8. Remove the fuel nozzle, replace the fuel filler cap by
turning until you hear one click, and then close the
fuel door.
NOTE:
○
Tighten the fuel fi ller cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication that
the cap is properly tightened.
○
After the click, pull on the cap at the handle to
verify it is secure and fastened.
○
If it is loose, and not secured to the filler tube,
reinstall and tighten again about a quarter turn
until you hear the click.
○
Verify the cap tether is not pinched between the
cap and filler tube.
○
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the
yellow Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light and
the “Check Fuel Cap” me ssage will appear in the
instrument cluster.
○
Be sure t he cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Instrument Cluster Message
Fuel Filler Door
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation o f most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fu el is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the RUN position (Pro-
pulsion System Active (PSA) not active).
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent valve will
not open. This will result in premature fuel pump
shutoffs.
2. Access the rear quarter trim panel in the cargo area
on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Remove the release cap from the quarter trim
panel.
4. After removing the release cap, pull it directly away
from the quarter trim panel to release the fuel door.
5. Reinstall the release cap into the quarter trim when
completed.
6. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your
vehicle.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-
tem can determine if the fuel filler cap i s possibly loose,
improperly insta lled , or damaged. If the system detects
a malfunction, t he “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is hea rd. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to
turn the mess age off. If the problem persists, the mes-
sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This might indica te a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL.
Resolving the problem will tu rn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Mo nth, Day and
Hour of manu facture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be lim-
ited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Release Cap Location
Fuel Door Emergency Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 18 7
4
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, opti ons and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axle s. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with t he lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires o r wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the act ual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity condit ions , and with no occupants
or cargo load ed into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that t he load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle . Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
affect on t he way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximu m front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this secti on you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual conc erni ng vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes d river, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load mu st be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 187.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumable s and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" conditio n.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded t rai ler on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trai ler must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Di str ibu te t he load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 187.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if e it her rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is t he downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum wid th of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed
between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It
typically provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitc hes are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized t rai lers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in acco rdance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a Weight-Distributing (load
equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply wi th
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be com-
patible with sur ge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
4
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing co ndi tio n.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
2.0L
Two-Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four-Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
2.0L PHEV
Sport/Sahara 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 k g) 350 lb (158 kg)
Rubicon 9,200 lb (4,173 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.6L
Two-Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four-Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
6.4L Four-Door 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (i.e., the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard
page 320.
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the traile r
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be consid er ed as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Plac-
ard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guid eli nes are
recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver
to control. You could lose control of your vehicle
and have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety cha ins must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retai ner s of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains unde r the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts o f the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trai ler tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information
page 320.
Weight Distribution
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
4
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle wit h that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal i njury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trai ler with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and cou ld have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space be tween your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the traile r weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they sho uld
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, r egardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness . Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the vehi-
cle's electrical connectors) before launching a boat
into water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shift-
ing when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while i n DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat bui ldu p. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
•
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear tha t allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example,
choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained.
Choose “4” or “3” if needed to mainta in the desired
speed.
•
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Co ntrol in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
•
Automatic transmission in PARK.
•
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL [N]).
•
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
•
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neut ral, auto-
matic transmission must be i n PARK, and manual trans-
mission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recre-
ational towing.
CAUTION!
•
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
•
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
the transfer case.
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
•
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
listed requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured o r killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position disen-
gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the pow-
ertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a co mplete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clut ch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmiss ion into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic trans-
mission in DRIV E or manual transmission in FIRST
gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmissi on into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shi fted into PARK with the transfer case in
(N) Neutral and the engine running. With the transfer
case in (N) Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF
before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suit-
able tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a co mplete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmiss io n into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired posi ti on.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral,
the engine sho uld remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of per forming in a
wide variety of off-road applicatio ns. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of con-
trol or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the underside of
the vehicle for each brac ket.
2. Remove the side step assembly.
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/bumper can
be removed by following the steps listed:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on s teel fascia/
bumpers only.
1. Loosen the two bolts t hat retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 Torx
bit screwdriver. Do not remove the bolts.
Underside Nuts
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
4
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and
store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt , gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect
on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Con-
trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-
road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel and mainta in a good driving posture. Avoid su d-
den accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases,
there are no road signs, posted spe ed limits or signal
lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good
judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a
trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface
obstacles and cha nges in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you
are currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recomme nde d that the Stop/Start system and the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if equipped)
be disabled d ur ing off-road use.
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can bec ome projectiles in
an off-road situation.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can r each
higher temperatures than in normal operating con-
ditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or se ri ou s injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional trac-
tion and cont rol on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend-
ing or desce ndi ng steep hills, and to increase low speed
pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or
sand where add it io nal low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L when operating the vehicle on dry
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultane-
ous use o f the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep
the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is
also used whe n you need to stop and restart a vehicle
on a steep incli ne.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear
and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift
to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and trac-
tion will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning
your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will
allow the tires to get fresh traction and help maintain
your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
MUD
Deep mud cre ates a great deal of suction around the
tires and i s very dif f icu lt to get t hrough. You shou ld use
DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L position to main-
tain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud
holes pose an increased thre at of vehicle damage and
getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from pre-
vious vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how
deep it i s, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the
vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing s oft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop.
The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate
tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If
you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or
dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of
15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area.
Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your trac-
tion and handli ng while driving on the soft sand, but
you must return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure
you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing
the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduce d tire pressur e, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacle s. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your abil-
ity to safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bri ng
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cau se abrupt steering s ystem
loading which cou ld cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the
correct path can be extremely di fficult when you are
confronting many obstacles. In these cases have some-
one guide you over, through, or around the obstacle.
Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the o bstacle , watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obst acle .
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the
side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks
with your tires.
CAUTION!
•
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH, WASH-
OUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles wit h steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or lef t at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accele rator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the runni ng ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
4
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get
out of t he vehicle and try to determine what t he vehicle
is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best directio n to recover the vehicle.
Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the
vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle
down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of und er body damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing re quires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too
steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should
always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and down.
Never attempt to climb a hill on an a ngle.
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the trac-
tion is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and
down? What is on top and the other side? Are there
ruts, rocks, branches o r other obstacles on the path?
Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident,
shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L
engaged, and proceed with caution, ma inta ini ng your
momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; t he abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the
front end begins to bounce, ease o ff the throttle slightly to
bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly pro-
ceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you
approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide
fresh traction into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back
straight down the grade using engine resistance along
with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, con-
trolled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is ther e plenty of distance at the base of the
hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast?
If you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make
sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine br aking.
Descending a grad e too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seri ou sly injured or killed.
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline
at an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases t he risk of a roll-
over, which may result in severe injury.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around.
To do so may result in tipping
(Continued)
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE.
Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the
vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,
always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted whe n necessary in a safe, responsible man-
ner. Only drive through areas which are designated and
approved. Tread lightly and avoid damage to the environ-
ment. Know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover
it if somet hing goes wrong. Never stop or shut a vehicle
off when crossing deep water unle ss you ingested water
into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not
attempt to restar t it. Determine i f it has ingested water
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into
FIRST gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with t he transfer case in the 4L position
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed of
{3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bot-
tom of the axle differentials, inspect all of the vehicle flu-
ids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
•
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, trans-
fer cas e, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
drive too fast or through too deep of water.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Water can cause permanent damage to engine,
driveline or other vehicle co mponents, and your
brakes will be less ef fective once wet and/or muddy.
•
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precautio n, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not
be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to deter-
mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If neces-
sary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with
a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach
angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or mud dy waters; check for hidden obstacles.
Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and
you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a
safe crossing i s the water depth, current and bottom
conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flo ode d or other standing water areas nor-
mally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types
normally contain hid den obstacles and make it difficult to
determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If
you are able to determine you can safely cross, than pro-
ceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle
downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shal-
low water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from
around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents i n depths greater than
the vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never
attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest cur-
rent can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out o f
control if the water is deep enough to push on the large
surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed,
determine the speed of the cu rr ent , the water's depth,
approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any
obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading slightly
upstream using the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of inju ry or drowning.
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
4
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does mos t on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely i nspect the under body of your vehicle.
Check tires, bo dy structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the rad iator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassi s, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if re quired, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clut ch vent holes in the manual trans-
mission bell hou si ng for mud and debris and clean
as required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to pre-
vent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar condi ti ons, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 NAV
With 12.3-inch Display, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicabi lit y, your vehicle may be able to
send or re cei ve information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with ce rtain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology c onti nue s to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 348, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combinat io n of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
on the center of the inst rume nt panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change the Customer Program-
mable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob located on the right sid e. Turn the control
knob to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the cont rol knob one or more times
to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Bac k Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
201
5
For The Uconnect 5 NAV With 12.3-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab at
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
•
All settings sho uld be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, press the button o n the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side o f the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are Español (Mexico), English (United States), Ital-
iano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode This setting wi ll allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it auto-
matically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display bright-
ness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. "Auto"
changes the theme with the headlights.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Dis-
tance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft) units
of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
202
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Nighttime Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust
the “Brightness Nighttime” setting. Selectable options are 1 t hrough 10.
Display Brightness Daytime Only available if Display Mode is set to “Manual”. This setting will allow you to adjust
the “Brightness Daytime” setting. Selectable opti ons are 1 through 10.
Cluster Options This settings allows users to select which content to display in each customizable area
on the Instru ment Cluster Display.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options
are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+ This setting will determine how the Off-Road feature is launched through the radio
when turning the vehicle on. The options a re “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped),
and “Off Road Pages”.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pres sed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are Español (Mexico), English (United States), Ital-
iano, and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Nighttime
This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Nighttime” setting. Select able
options are 1 through 10.
MULTIMEDIA 203
5
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to adjust the “Brightness Daytime” setting. Selectable
options are 1 through 10.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark mode. "Auto"
changes the theme with the headlights.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (mph or km/h), “Dis-
tance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft) units
of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will se t the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconne ct”, and “Hey, Je ep”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Of f ” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 min” and “20 min”.
204
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings. For more informa-
tion about audio settings, please refer to the Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting wi ll reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting wi ll return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume
This setting will let you adjust the Warning Cluster Buzzer Volume. Selectable options
are “Low”, “Mid”, and “High”.
Cluster Options
This setting will display options for the cluster using the Uconnect touchscreen.
Options include “Trip B On Cluster”, “Custom Areas on Cluster”, and “Widget List”.
Auto-On Comfort
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Of f ” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 205
5
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on t he features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desi re d folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or of f. The “Off”
setting will d eact ivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collisi on is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a c olli sio n is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert
sounds. The “Med iu m” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in
view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when t he object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the
FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or off.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected
and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting ad jus ts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting ad jus ts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting wi ll provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will act ivate both the lights on the outs ide mirrors and an audible chime.
Traffic Sign Recognition This setting will turn Traffic Sign Recognition on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
206
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The avail-
able options ar e “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver Alert This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indi-
cating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will customize the Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Intelligent Speed Options This setting will let you customize your Intelligent Speed Options. Selectable options
are “Manual Confir m” and “Auto Confirm”.
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is run-
ning, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message
will appear to check the rear seat whe n the vehicle is powered OFF.
Front Passenger Airbag This setting wi ll let you enable or disable the Front Passenger Airbag.
Power Side Step This setting will activate the Power Side Step. The “Auto” setting will lower the step
when the doo r is opened and retract it once the door is closed. The “Off” setting wi ll
deactivate t he feature.
MULTIMEDIA 207
5
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will con-
trol the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will se t the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You will also be able
to adjust the clock.
Set Date This setting wi ll allow you to set the date.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
208
MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Blu etooth® button is pressed o n the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setti ng will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options
are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is com-
pleted by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” se tt ing will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Comma nd List off.
MULTIMEDIA 209
5
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on t he touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting wi ll add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting wi ll turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting wi ll turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button i s pressed on the touchscreen, t he system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
210
MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on t he touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Illuminated Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Interior Ambient Lights on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will so und the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” set-
ting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will s ou nd the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
212
MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Of f ” set-
ting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate
the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4 This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches.
There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX
switches can e it her be set to run o ff the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to
setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous
state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to
“On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type i s set to Latching and the
power source is set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 213
5
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Doors On Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned on.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audi o volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the vol-
ume will incr ease more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”,
“2”, and “3”.
214
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port .
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Siriu sXM® Setup button is pressed o n the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip spe-
cific radio channels and rest art favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to t he SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM®
menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 215
5
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its d efault settings. These settings can
clear personal data and rese t selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using
or installing apps.
Restore Settings to Default This setting wi ll return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
System Information
When the System Information button i s pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
216
MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand cont rol is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pu shing the top o f the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right -hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The f unct io n of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode :
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio pre se t button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to t he beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lesse ned or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor-
mance does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wi re less radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used i n
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of t he scien-
tific community.
The radio manu facturer believes the internal wireless
radio is sa fe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard a ir-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 352.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will
provide you vehicle status information while operating
on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating
to the status of the drivetrain, transfer case, coolant/oil
gauges, pitch and roll of the vehicle, and access to the
trailcam system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road button
on the touchscreen, and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
Remote Sound System Controls
MULTIMEDIA 21 7
5
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information con-
cerning the d ynamics of the vehicle.
The following information is displayed:
•
Steering angle in d egre es
•
Status of Transfer Case
•
Status of the Rear Axle
•
Status of the Front Axle
•
Status of the Sway Bar
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status
of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Tem-
perature (Automatic Transmissions Only), and Battery
Voltage.
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side)
in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualiza-
tion of the current vehicle angle.
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front view
of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam bu tton on the
touchscreen.
Vehicle Dynamics Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2—SwayBar
3 — Transfer Case Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
5 — Front Axle Locker Status
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmis-
sions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
TrailCam Activation
218 MULTIMEDIA
TRAIL RECORDING — IF EQUIPPED
Overview
The Trail Recording feature can be accessed from a
variety of different ways: Within the Vehicle Dashboard
screen, from the App Drawer menu, within the Off-Road
Pages Vehicle Dynamics tab, or from the Start Record-
ing feature within the Adventure Guides app. There will
be options wit hin “Trail Recording” where you can start
recording your trail or view saved recordings where you
can see previous tr ai ls recorded.
Recording A Trail And Stop Recording
To start recording a trail, select “Start Recording”
towards the bottom of the touchscreen. Once selected,
your trail will start recording for as long as desired.
When the trail is over, press “Stop Recording”. Select
whether to save the trail in which the trail wi ll be saved
and will appear in “Saved Recordings”. Selecting “Can-
cel” will not save the trail, and the trail will be deleted.
NOTE:
After 30 miles (48 km) a notification will appear on the
touchscreen asking if you want to keep recording.
Adding a Waypoint
On the bottom left-hand side of the touchscreen select
“Add Waypoint” from the trail recording screen. This will
allow the user to pin a location along the trail, both dur-
ing and after the recording. There are three selectable
options to mark a Waypoint: A Waypoint can be placed
whether the vehicle is in or out of motion, but can only
be edited when the vehicle is not moving. As a default,
Waypoints are named chronologically in the order in
which the Waypoints are marked or added. They can be
renamed later by pressing the edit icon located to the
right of the defaulted Waypoint name.
•
Places
•
Obstacle
•
Guidance
NOTE:
A Waypoint can be placed whether or not the vehicle is
in motion, but can only be edited when the vehicle is
not moving.
Expand/Collapse View
While in the Trail Recording screen, press the Expand
button located to the right of the Map View to enlarge
the Trail Map screen during recordings. Once in
expanded view, press the collapse icon which will
shrink the tr ail map during screen recordings.
Editing A Trail
After finishing recording a tr ail, there will be a scale to
rate the difficulty of the trail for future reference. The
scale is from 1-10 with o ne being the easiest and
10 being the most difficult.
NOTE:
Setting the di fficulty is not required to save the trail and
can be edited afterwards.
Editing/Deleting a Waypoint
To edit a Waypoint, sele ct the desired Waypoint on the
map. Once selected, choo se the type of Waypoint. Once
selected, choose a sub-type that desc ribe s the Waypoint.
Waypoint sub-types are listed in the following table:
Places Obstacles Guidance
Camping Mud Bare Left
Scenic View Rock Bare Right
Staging Area Sand Dead End
Places Obstacles Guidance
Trailhead Steep Asce nt Hard Left
Water Steep Descent Hard Right
Water Slow
Route Closure
Waypoints can be renamed later by pressing the pencil
icon located to the right of the defaulted Waypoint
name. Selecting the pencil icon will bring up a keyboard
which will allow you to customize the Waypoint name.
NOTE:
Editing Waypoints is not available while the vehicle is in
motion. To edi t and customize Waypoints the vehicle
must not be in motion.
If you want to Delete a Waypoint, select the Waypoint
that you created and press the delete Waypoint button
located towards the bottom of your touchscreen. The
pop-up, “Your waypoint was deleted successfully” will
appear on your touchscreen once the Waypoint was
successfully deleted.
Saving And Canceling A Trail
When finished e dit ing a trail select “Save”. The trail will
be stored in the Saved Recordings tab.
Selecting “Cancel” wi ll delete the t rai l, and a pop-up
screen will appear asking if you are sure that you want
to cancel your current trail recording. Selecting “No,
Don’t Cancel”, or the X button, will take you back to the
Waypoint editing screen. Selecting “Yes, Cancel” will
discard the selected trail recording.
MULTIMEDIA 219
5
Saved Trails
To view previously saved trails, click the Saved Record-
ings button on the Trail Recording home page. Once
entering Saved Recordings, a list of previously saved
trails will be listed. The Remove Icon button to the far
right of e ach trail will delete the tr ai l. To delete all trails
select “Delete All” towards the bottom of the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
Saved recordings can be accessed even once the Brand
connected services subscription has expired.
After selecting a saved recording, options will be avail-
able to view, edit, delete, or export the recording onto a
USB device. Pressing “View Performance Data” will
showcase the vehicle’s pitch, roll, altitude, and location
for each selected Waypoint. A Snapshot feature is avail-
able, where a photo of the performance data can be
exported to a connected USB device.
Export a Recording onto a USB
After selecting a saved recording, press the Export but-
ton towards the bottom of the touchscreen and select
the USB icon option. There will be a pop-up message
afterwards stating whether or not the export was
successful.
ADVENTURE GUIDES — IF EQUIPPED
To access the Adventure Guides feature, press the
Vehicle icon on the lower menu bar of your touch-
screen. From the Vehicle Dashboard, press “Adventure
Guides”.
To search for an off-road trail:
1. Press the search box and enter an address or
keyword.
NOTE:
○
An active subscription to Brand Connect con-
nected services is required to access the Adven-
ture Guides feature. If you do not have an active
subscription, click the Register button on the
touchscreen and follow the prompts.
○
If there i s no network connection, a message will
display on your touchscreen, “Data connection
temporarily not available. Please try again later.”
Press “OK”, and ensure there is a stable network
connection.
○
If there are no search results within the area in
which you added the address or keyword, the
message “No Results Found” will display on your
touchscreen.
2. The distance to each search re su lt will appear on
the left of each destination. The difficulty level of
each trail wi ll show towards the right of each desti-
nation. Select the trail you wish to navigate to.
NOTE:
○
Press the Map View button to view an expanded
summary of each trail and its difficulty level.
Search For An Off-Road Trail
Trail Difficulty
Map View Button
220
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Each trail de ta il screen will provide you information
such as an address, phone number, typical open/
close times, and vehicle requirements.
3. Press the Preview Trail button to view the trail info.
Press the Start Recording button which will bring
you to the Trail Recording app landing page where
you will be able to save the recording, view saved
recordings, and see the distance to your destination.
NOTE:
Pressing the B ack arrow on the Trail Info page will
bring you back to the trail detail screen.
4. Press the Navigate To Trail button which will send
the directions to your TomTom Navigation system.
5. If the trail does not exist within your Uconnect sys-
tem’s local memory, press the Download button. If
the trail alr ead y exists, meaning it has already been
downloaded at some point, press the Check For
Updates button.
NOTE:
○
“Trail Updated Successfully” will display towards
the top of your touchscreen if the trail update
was completed properly. If “Trail could not
update. Not enough space” appears, you will
need to clear up space under your “Downloaded
Trails” by removing trails that are no longer
needed or desired. “No Updates available”
means the trai l you have selected is up-to-date.
○
Pressing “X” on any of these screens will take
you back to the trail details screen.
Trails Near You
The Trails Near You feature will show the first 20 trails
based on 500 miles (805 km) within your current vehi-
cle’s location.
NOTE:
If there are no trails within a 500-mile (805-km) radius
within your current vehicle’s location, “No Results
Found” will appear on your touchscreen.
Preloaded Trails
Press “Preloaded Trails” to see a list of trails that are
preloaded onto your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
“Preloaded Trails” cannot be deleted from the list, as
they are the default trails that remain on your system
permanently.
Expanded Trail Difficulty View
Preview Trail
Navigate To Trail
Preloaded Trails
MULTIMEDIA 221
5
Downloaded Trails
Any trail that you wish to download, press the Download
button on the trail you have selected.
NOTE:
•
“Trail Downloaded Successfully” will display towards
the top of your touchscreen if the trail was down-
loaded properly. Once the download has been suc-
cessful, “Check for updates” will be available if you
wish to check the trail for updates.
•
“Downloaded Trails Full. Free up some space” will
display towards the top of your touchscreen if there
is not enough space. Press the Downloaded Trails
button to remove existing trails.
Press the Remove icon to remove a trail from the list.
You will be presented with a confirmation, “Are you sure
you want to delete this trail?”. Press “Yes” to show the
selected trail was deleted successfully, or press “No” or
the X button which will br ing you back to the Down-
loaded Trails list.
Remove Downloaded Trails
222 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The sys-
tem automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a s light
clicking sound a s well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, rai lroad
tracks, loose debris, or pani c stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may con-
tinue to hear for a short time after the stop)
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equip-
ment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result
in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-loc k braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent t he natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it incr ease
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent co llis ions , including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited i n a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that co uld jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety o f others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it i ndi cates that the anti -lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possi ble to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
AUDIBLE PEDESTRIAN WARNING
SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning system. The Audible Pedestrian Warning sys-
tem uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that your
vehicle is approaching. In addition, the system will indi-
cate changes in vehicle speed by varying the relative
volume.
The system uses two external speakers. One is located
in the unde r-hood compartment and the other is in the
rear of the vehicle. The Audible Pedestrian Warning sys-
tem is active when the vehicle is not in PARK and is
223
6
traveling at lower speeds. Depending on the selected
gear (REVERSE, DRIVE, or NEUTRAL), the system acti-
vates the corresponding speaker location based on the
intended direction of travel.
NOTE:
The system is acti ve when driving in Electric mo de only.
WARNING!
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is not
intended to avoid a collision. It is always the driver's
responsibility to be attentive to t he vehicle’s distance
between other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly utilize brake operation to ensure
safe dr ivi ng of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while driv-
ing to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in a collision or seri-
ous personal inju ry.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
(RSRA) — IF EQUIPPED
RSRA alerts you through visual and auditory notifica-
tions of the possible presenc e of an object, passenger,
or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to
10 minutes before the ignition was placed in the
ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When the
previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the mes-
sage “Check Rear Sea t” on the instrument cluster di s-
play and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver plac-
ing the igniti on in the OFF.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 201.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF positi on, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number o f
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped wi th Hill Descent
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while dri ving, it indicates tha t the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking mane uvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount o f brake application and
then applies opti mum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desire d. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it incre ase the tractio n afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilitie s of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
(Continued)
224 SAFETY
WARNING!
never be exploited i n a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize t he user's safety or the
safety o f others.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitor-
ing the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of
the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped)
page 225.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loa ding, road condi-
tions and dr ivi ng conditions, influe nce the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which co uld jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances dire cti onal control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to coun-
teract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual pat h of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in cou nteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instr ume nt cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system become s active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditio ns. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in tu rns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss o f vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, at tentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabili ti es of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which cou ld jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increa se the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and dea th.
SAFETY 225
6
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon mo del and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be
in this mode . This mode should be used for most driv-
ing conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be
used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thr esho lds for acti-
vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light wi ll
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Mul-
tiple attempts may be required to return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public roadways.
In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OF F but-
ton for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the
ESC OFF Indicator Light will illumi nate, and the “ESC Off”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentari ly push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active
when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will
not switch to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will
remain in "Full Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or
ESC is re-enabled by the d ri ver.
WARNING!
•
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stabili ty features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintain-
ing stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditio ns. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in tu rns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument clu ster will come on
when the igniti on is turned to the “ESC On”
mode. It shou ld go out with the engine run-
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on cont inu ous ly with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains o n after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (km) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as so on as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and co rre cted.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acce ler ati on, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
226 SAFETY
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on mome ntar ily
each time the ignition i s placed in the ON position.
•
Each time the ignition is place in the ON position,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is norma l; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inact ive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descend-
ing hills duri ng various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and wi ll not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the fol-
lowing conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
The parking brake is released.
•
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
then door mu st be closed. If doors are detached,
then driver seat belt must be buckled.)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
marizes the HDC set speeds :
HDC Target Set Speeds
•
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
•
R=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
D=0.6mph(1km/h)
•
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
•
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
•
5th=3.1mph(5km/h)
•
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
•
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
•
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
•
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When act ively controlling HDC the t ransmi s-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corr espond ing driving conditio ns.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
•
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
•
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
•
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is o n level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
•
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the fol-
lowing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if doors
are attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors
are detached.)
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
•
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
SAFETY 227
6
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an H DC icon and the HDC
switch has an indicator light, which offers feedback to
the driver about the state HDC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch ind icator light will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition for
HDC.
•
The cluster icon and switch ind icator light will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are
not met.
•
The cluster icon and switch ind icator light will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when HDC dis-
ables due to excess speed.
•
The cluster icon and switch ind icator light will flash
when HDC deacti vates due to overheated brakes.
The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will con-
tinue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door mu st be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear select ion must match vehicle uphill d ir ec-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if t he transmis-
sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed,
HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to d ist ance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe co ntrol of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to
page 201 for further
information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trai ler on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK (P).
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or se rio us personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no dri ver interaction is
required.
228 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situatio n may occur by
monitoring how fast the t hrottle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will pre-
pare the brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD
Low only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by
actively controlling engine torque and
brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and wi ll not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the fol-
lowing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•
The parking brake is released.
•
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, the
driver seat belt must be buckled).
•
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
•
The driver releases the throttle.
•
The driver releases the brake.
•
The driver seat belt is buckled.
•
The transmission is in any selection other than
PARK.
•
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
•
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, the
driver seat belt must be buckled).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally,
the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a
grade and t he level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the
SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
•
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
•
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
•
5th=3.1mph(5km/h)
•
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
•
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
•
8th=5mph(8km/h)
•
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
•
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Road+
•
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h)
•
3rd=1.2mph(2km/h)
•
4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
•
5th=1.8mph(3km/h)
•
6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
•
7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
•
8th=5mph(8km/h)
•
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
•
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
•
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
•
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. While actively con-
trolling SSC, the transmissio n will shift appropriately
for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding
driving conditions.
•
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive
mode if act ive. The differences may be notable to
the driver as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available i f any of
the following conditions occur:
•
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
SAFETY 229
6
•
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
•
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the SSC swi tch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
•
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if doors
are attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors
are detached).
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a light that offers feedback to the driver
about the st ate SSC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on soli d when SSC is enabled or activated.
These are the normal operati ng conditions for SSC.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditio ns are not met.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disable s due to
excess speed.
•
The cluster icon and switch light will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in o ff-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD) functi ons similarly to a limited slip differen-
tial and cont rols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
page 188.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
230 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system moni-
tors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will aler t the driver of vehicles
in these are as.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equip-
ment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM Warning Light remaining illu-
minated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear
page 201.
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking o n and off) of the side mir-
ror warning indicator light when a motorcycle or any
small object rema ins at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminants accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If block-
age is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable,
Wipe Rear Corners” message will display in the cluster,
both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The sys-
tem will automatically recover and resume function
when the condit io n clears. To minimize system block-
age, do not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper
where the rad ar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep
it clear of road contaminants.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime ) alert and reducing the radio volume
page 233.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv -
ing to see if an ale rt is necessary. The BSM system will
issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
Side Monitoring
SAFETY 231
6
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasio nally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 352.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or ani mals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in se ri ou s injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their visi on of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an o nco ming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
232 SAFETY
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed o f approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If t he sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result i n serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM sys-
tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will re spond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is pre se nt. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn si gnal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn si gnal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In ad di tio n to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also mu ted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is pre sent . Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is i gnore d; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there wi ll be no
visual or au dible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Door Removal
When either t he front driver or passenger door is
removed, the instrument cluster will display “Blind Spot
Temporarily Unavailable” and the BSM system will dis-
able. While the system will continue to indicate what-
ever blind spot mode it was previously in within the
Uconnect system, no visual or au dible alerts will be pro-
vided. As long as the doors are removed, the instru-
ment cluster will provide the “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable” pop-up as a reminder that the system is
disabled every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will
resume functionality based on the personalized mode
selected.
SAFETY 233
6
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the d ri ver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instru-
ment cluster display), and may apply a haptic warning
in the form of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is prob-
able, the dri ver will be provided with audible and visual
warnings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If t he Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
When the system d etermines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
page 352.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the cour se prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of t he system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. In rare situations, the sys-
tem may react to surrounding objects such as t un-
nels, bridges, gua rdrails, etc. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking, steering, and acceleration. Unin-
tended braking reactions can always be overridden by
pressing down hard on the accelerator. Failure to fol-
low this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW setting menu can be adjusted through the
Uconnect Settings
page 201.
•
To turn the FCW system on, select between “Only
Warning” and “Warning and Braking” in the FCW
menu.
•
Select “OFF” in the FCW menu to turn the FCW sys-
tem off.
NOTE:
•
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
FCW Message
234 SAFETY
•
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster di splay.
•
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this pre-
vents the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
•
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a pos-
sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
•
The system will r et ain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconne ct system
page 201.
•
Far
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible more distant collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.
○ More cautious drivers that do not mind fr equent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collisi on warnings experienced.
•
Medium
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using aud ible/vi sual warnings.
•
Near
○ When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible closer collisio n with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
○ This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
○ More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” sett ing may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collisi on warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instru ment cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Wi ndshi eld” momentarily, the re may be a condi-
tion that li mit s FCW functionality. Although the vehicle
is still dri vable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer pres-
ent, the system will return to its full performance state.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system tu rns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
•
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an i nternal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal condi-
tions, have the system checked by an authorize d
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressu re Monitoring System (TPMS) wi ll warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the
tire is i nflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressu re will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will d e cre ase . Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pre ssur e after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See page 320 on how to properly inflate the vehi-
cle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature ef fects
and natural pre ssu re loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, a nd will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or a bove the recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
SAFETY 235
6
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minu tes a bove 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to rec eive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but t he TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situa tio n, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value
page 326.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
(Continued)
CAUTION!
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance. Customers are encouraged to use Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure
TPMS feature operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre -
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adju sti ng your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped wi th a Tire Fill Alert or
Selectable Tire Fill Alert feature.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated t ire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also redu ces fuel efficiency and tire tr ead life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping abili ty.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will af fect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actu al tire pres-
sure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressu re Monitoring System (TPMS) u se s wire-
less technology with wheel rim mou nted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly impor tant for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Mo nitoring System sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
236 SAFETY
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pre ssur e is low in one o r more of
the four active road tires. In addition, t he
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for
a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
Should this occu r, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the ti re s with low pressure (those i n a different
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on soli d. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addi tio n, the instrument cluster will di splay a
"SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the igniti on is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
•
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
•
Using tire chai ns on the vehicle
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor, and can be moni-
tored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next igni-
tion switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning
Light to be on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and
the graphic di splay will still show the low tire pres-
sure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire as semblie s (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that d o not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and ti re assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with t ir es not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRES-
SURE SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
SAFETY 237
6
Beginning with t he next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime o r display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires e quipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, dri ve the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seco nds
and then tur n off. The instru ment cluster will di splay the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the
next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYS-
TEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or d ef lati ng the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire
Fill Alert feature in the customer settings menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
•
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the
Tire Fill Alert system.
•
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system
is in deact ivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects
an increase i n tire pressure while filling the tire. The
ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the trans-
mission in PARK for vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, the parking br ake must be
applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter
Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is
in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come
on while inflati ng the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor may be in an inoperative positi on, pre-
venting the TPMS sensor signal from bei ng received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Operation:
•
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when
to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recom-
mended pressure.
•
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continu e to chirp every five seconds i f the
user continues to inflate the tire.
•
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
•
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if t he user continu es to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every time
the ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature at the next ignition “RUN” state, the cus-
tomer must re-enable the feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) —
IF EQUIPPED
The STFA system is an optional feature that is included
as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system
is designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate
or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and
to provide feedback while inflating or deflating the vehi-
cle's tires.
NOTE:
To use the STFA feature, the Tire Fill Alert feature must
be enabled through u se of the customer settings in the
radio.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the
front and rear axle tire press ure s by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle se tti ng.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axle s as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each
axle in the Uconnect system applic ati on as preset pres-
sure values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values
can be stored in the Uconnect system for the front and
rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the
front and rear axle s that you want to inflate or deflate
to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a
time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating
one tire at a time.
238
SAFETY
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmissio n, and
in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles
with a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will
come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instr ume nt cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflat-
ing the tire , the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor
may be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from bei ng received. In this case, the
vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
Horn chirps wi ll indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the follow-
ing STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pres-
sure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authori zed dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restr ai nt system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly mus t be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seat ing position
page 255.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenge r
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child re str aint
page 255.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under thei r arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side a ir bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be inju re d.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 348 for customer service co ntac t
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rea r-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 239
6
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a colli sio n.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejec tio n and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the igni tio n switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat B elt Ale rt) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Se at
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remai n on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning se quence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the dri ver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if e quipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sound ing an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until t he seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The dri ver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the se at belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remai n on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating posi tio ns in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisi ons. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the ai r bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the a ir bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even thou gh you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo ar ea, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more li kely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
240 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a c rash.
•
Wearing your seat belt inco rre ctly could make your
injuries in a collision muc h worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, i t could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an author ized dealer imme dia tely a nd
have it fixed.
•
A seat belt that is buckled into t he wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A seat belt that is too loose wi ll not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasi ng the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
(Continued)
WARNING!
modify the se at belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the se at.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
SAFETY 241
6
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4.
Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To re move
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shou lde r belt across the shoulder and
chest with mini mal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To r ele ase the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the se at belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adju sted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, a nd move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer t he shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt ancho rage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable u pper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it i s locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorre ctly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
242 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with mini mal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat be lt could reduc e the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest positio n, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be use d only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of ser io us injury or death in a
collision. Only u se the Seat Belt Extender when the
(Continued)
WARNING!
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the
event of a collision. These devices may improve the per-
formance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt ea rly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, i nclu ding those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt sti ll must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front and second row outboard seat belt systems
are equipped with an Energy Management feature that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assem-
bly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
SAFETY 243
6
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem. The figure be low illustrates the locking feature for
each seating pos iti on
page 262.
If the passenger seating positio n is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-secti on. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mo de anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating positi on that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rea r-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3.
Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indic ates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the co mbinat io n lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in t he Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of inju ry in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who ar e wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster s eat s. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
244 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authori zed dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Oc cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped wi th the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Bu ckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side A ir Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If t he ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to ei ght sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, t he Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air B ag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag sys-
tem. The diagnostics also record the nature of the mal-
function. While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight second s when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the spee do me ter, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service t he air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Ai r Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mea n you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it co mes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer ser vice
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant A ir Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Ai r Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Ai r Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the vehicle immediately
page 133
.
SAFETY 245
6
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belt s
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to t he seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front ai r bag deployment cou ld cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rea r-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as de termined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used i n less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle swit ch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat t rack position sensor s that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat posi ti on.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classi ficat io n System
(OCS) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag depe ndi ng on the occupant’s seated weight. It
is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a category other
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Ai r Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light (an
amber light loca ted on the overhead sports bar) tells
the driver and front passenger when the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indica-
tor Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects ar e placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
•
No objects shou ld be placed over or near t he air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
246 SAFETY
WARNING!
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Relying on the ai r bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front A ir Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce t he risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole co llisi ons, truck under ri de s, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measu re vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instr ume nt panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classifi cati on System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depe ndi ng on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could
be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light –
an amber light located on the overhead sports
bar
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Passenger Seat B e lt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classifi cati on Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classi fic atio n. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
uses the cla ssif icat io n to determine whether it should
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated pas-
sengers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat wi th their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with the ir back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
SAFETY 247
6
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupie d or has very
light objects in it.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a re ar-
facing child restraint.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child ,
including a chi ld seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child or small adult.
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled
Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat* Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restr aint
or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects ar e placed on the seat and the seat belt is
unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat a nd never install a chi ld restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rea r-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.
The PAD Ind ica tor light illuminates the words “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a colli-
sion. When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat
belt is unbuckle d, the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light
is NOT illuminated.
248 SAFETY
The PAD i ndi cator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated i n the front pas-
senger seat. The driver and adult passenger should
verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated
when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an
adult is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator
Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indi cator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions, even
with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD
Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.
NEVER
assume the Pas senger Advanced Front Air Bag
is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illumi-
nated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, t he PAD
Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger
seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat mas-
sagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the
seat, with t he passenger’s feet comfortably on or
near the flo or, and with their back against the
seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remai n
in this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately. Failure to
do so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words "PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag will not deploy in the event of a
collision.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rea r-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Pass enger
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not
be activated for a lighter weight passenger, inclu ding a
small adult (depend ing on size) who is seated in the
passenger seat. Thi s does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deacti-
vated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” whe n an adult is in
the front passenger se at, have the passenger reposi-
tion his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator
Light goes ou t.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification o f the occupant
that it d etects. The OCS will detect the f ront passe n-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in d ea cti vation or activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
SAFETY 249
6
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s s eated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in deactivation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag causi ng serious injury or death.
Increasing the f ront passenge r’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation of the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper
front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seat back is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carr ie s or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lo dged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lo dge d between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger se at are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output si gnal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, chi ld, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
250 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Always wear your seat belt a nd sit properly, with
the seatback i n an upright position, your back
against the seat back, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classi fy the front passenger seat
status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Ai r Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air
bags to protect you in a colli sio n. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is
first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle,
or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor u nde r the front passenger seat.
•
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front A ir Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain
deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates
that you should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflat io n. In order for the OCS to properly classify
the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat compo-
nents, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, t ri m
cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger se at assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This c ould result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a co llisi on. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with di sabili ti es, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with t he knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as ala rm lights, stereos, cit izen band
radios, etc.
SAFETY 251
6
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are mar ked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on
a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injur y
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam i nto the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the ar ea where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side A ir Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys d ownward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The si de impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags o n the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
252 SAFETY
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air B ags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Ai r Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indi cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air B ags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who a re up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the do or,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the se ats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child re str aint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air B ags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the do or or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could ca use you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Sid e Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during ai r bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Bu ckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side A ir Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pre tensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front a nd/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This doe s not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or s kin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and norma lly heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irr ita tio n, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
SAFETY 253
6
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pre tensioners, and the seat belt r et ractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open dur ing air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on t he nature of the event, the Occ upant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
•
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Ci rculation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic tra nsmiss ion gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
START or ON/OFF position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart-
ment and on the ground near the engine compartment
and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-
dent, reset the system by following the procedure
described below. If you have any dou bt, contact an
authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure — GAS
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem functions after an event, the ignition switch must
be changed from igniti on START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after per-
forming the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed
to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure — PHEV
After an event oc cur s requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
message will be displayed on the instru ment cluster.
The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the high voltage battery and engine,
the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the hazard flashers, inte-
rior lights, power door locks, or the HVAC blower motor,
the ignition switch must be changed from START or
ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
254 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
senger side of the instr ume nt panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any par t of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat att achment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the ai r bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road o bstacle , data that will
assist in und erst andi ng how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typi cally 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better und er stand ing of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash si tu ati on occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally id enti fyi ng data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In ad di ti on to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and child re n. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadi an province, requires
that small childr en ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear se ats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestraine d child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are di fferent sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manu al to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it i n the vehicle where you will use it.
SAFETY 255
6
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Ha rnes s, facing
forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in
a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the he ight or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recomme nde d for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but ar e still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious inju ry to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by t he child seat.
All children who se weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
256 SAFETY
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt -posi tio ning booster
seat are he ld in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installati on can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The chi ld could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat for ward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restrai nt attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious pe r-
sonal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who ar e large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seat back, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use thi s simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitt ing all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the be lt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole t ri p?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” the n
the child sti ll needs to use a booster seat in thi s
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shou lde r belt, check
seat belt fit periodically a nd make sure the seat belt
buckle is latche d. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
SAFETY 257
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called L ATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushio n where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the se ati ng position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positio ns, the seat belt must be
used with t he top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
258
SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage sys-
tem to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchora ges if
allowed by t he booster seat ma nufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
Two Door Models – No Center Seating
Position
Four Door Models – Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner anchora ges are
18.5 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage ?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child re str aint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restrai nts be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restr aint can be removed if it inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
page 63.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it
(Two-Door Models).
SAFETY 259
6
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when t he seat is to be used by an occ upant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head re str aint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it me et s the seatback. They are ju st
visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the chi ld restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushi on. If your vehicle is equipped with
anchorage symbols on the seatback, they will be
located just above the lower anchorages.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear se ati ng position located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
260 SAFETY
and some rea r-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating posi ti on.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only inst all this
type of child restraint i n the outboard seating positions.
Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower
attachments can be installed in any rear seating
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the out-
board positions.
Please see
page 261 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
page 262 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach t he hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head r est ra int (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear se at can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 264 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test tha t the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child re str aint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
•
Improper installati on of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorage s can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
SAFETY 261
6
WARNING!
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installati on or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt ti ght around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” i nto a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
page 244 for additional information on ALR.
Please see t he table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
262 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint
is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restrai nts be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restr aint can be removed if it inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
page 63.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the inst allati on of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it (Two-Door Models).
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when t he seat is to be used by an occ upant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head re str aint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installati on or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or r aise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
SAFETY 263
6
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2.
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3.
Slide the latch plate into the bu ckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the chi ld seat.
5.
To lock the seat belt, pull d own on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child re str aint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the ancho rage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 264 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in f ront of the car seat, including the
seat frame o r a tether ancho rage . Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that i s approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle, see
page 258.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. If the seat can be moved, you may need to
move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the c hild
restraint to another positio n in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap u nde r the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
264 SAFETY
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap cou ld lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position direc tly
behind the chi ld seat to secure a c hild restraint top
tether strap.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head
restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the se at back and head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located on the back of
the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in the se areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags de ploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unre str ai ned pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, o r injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restr aine d in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harness es or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collec-
tion & Pri vacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber-
security”
page 142.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the pos-
sible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident i nvolving serious injury or death.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
SAFETY 265
6
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the sea t belt system period ically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor co ndi ti ons,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition swi tch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the
light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv-
ing, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. See
page 239 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that
is securely a ttac hed using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch ped als and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secur ed using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an addit io nal floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present ) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, re move the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the flo or mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can beco me trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and chec k the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch ped als then re-install the floor mats.
•
It is recomme nde d to only u se mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secur ed to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
266 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the trea d or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check t he tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru -
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area und er vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are d etected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with t he trunk/liftgate/
rear doors o pen, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use t he recirculation mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, ad just your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositione d
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addit io n, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oi l change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until r epai re d, drive with
all side windows fully open.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
SAFETY 267
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is a cti vated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST
and an SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traf fic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued)
WARNING!
assume all ris ks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 352.
•
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in fu ncti on.
Other Uconnect s ervices will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are con-
nected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its
location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
assistance.
•
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
•
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
•
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
268
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS
Call connection, push the SOS call button on the over-
head console o r press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call wi ll turn off
the green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green
once a connect io n to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an
SOS operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traf fic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
(Continued)
WARNING!
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connect io n is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional help is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the ope rator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle oc cupant s and
hear sounds occurring in t he vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smo ke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), d o not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
(Continued)
WARNING!
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. A n operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add af termarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, d ata recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You co uld be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously illuminate red.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
7
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illu mina ted, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call s ystem i mmed iately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfuncti on in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light i s illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operatio n. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition i s in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traf fic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any clea ning solution dire ct ly onto the mirror.
Apply the soluti on onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modif icat ions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be cru shed . Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jac k. If you need to get
under a rai se d vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine whi le the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
Scan me
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires o nly. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a fir m level surface only. Avoid
ice or sli ppery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a
manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo
area. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access by
pulling the load floor handle up and directly rearward.
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching the
latch on the left side and pulling upward.
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to loosen
the jack from the storage bin.
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Wheel Blocked Example
Load Floor Handle
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
Plastic Wing Nut Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 27 1
7
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. To r emove the spare tire from the carrier, remove
the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the lock
bolt counterclockwise with the #T40 torx head driver
and ratchet from the supplied tool kit.
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning
them counterclockwise. If equipped, remove the
locking lug nut with the lock key (located in the glove
box) turning it counterclockwise.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an auto-
matic transmission into PARK; a manual transmis-
sion into REVERSE.
•
Block the whee l diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine wi th the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the
jack handle dri ver to the extension, then to the lug
wrench.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
Removing The Spare Tire
Jack Warning Label
Assembled Jack And Tools
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
If your vehicle comes with factory equipped 35 inch
(88.9 cm) tires, a jack lift block is provided in the
rear cargo a rea . The jack lift block is used to provide
higher ground clearance when changing a flat or
spare tire. When placing the jack lift block under the
jack, be sure the bottom of the jack fits securely
inside of the raised e dge s of the block.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as
shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated.
Jack Lift Box Usage
Front Lifting Point Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
7
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clock-
wise. Raise t he vehicle only u nti l the tire just clears
the surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Mini mum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip o ff the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to change the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Light ly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in se ri ou s injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a
star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tight-
ened twice
page 342. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nu ts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tir e on the spare tire
carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the
camera cover by turning the lock clockwise using
the provided #40 torx head driver and ratchet.
Then, reinstall the camera cover by slipping it over
the camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
WARNING!
A loose ti re or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, i t can be jump
started u si ng a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-on
the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage bat-
tery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery, provide elec-
tric vehicle operation, and to start t he vehicle's gas
engine. If the 12 Volt battery has been discharged, the
Rear Jacking Location Lock Bolt Location
27 4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
vehicle can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage batter y has also been dis-
charged, it wi ll need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
•
If the vehicle can be co nnected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
•
If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt power
to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting the
transmission from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N).
Power provided by the jumper cables will also allow
the Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully
move the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge loca-
tion. While the vehicle is being moved, the external
12 Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that con-
trol of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12 Volt
power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's transmis-
sion may engage PARK. Do not allow the jumper cables
to come in contact with each other or to the vehicle,
this will resu lt in a short.
When the vehicle is at t he charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the Electric Park
Brake, and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
WARNING!
•
Only use the positive battery post on the main bat-
tery to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or
death could result if you attempt to jump start
using the suppleme ntal battery.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output gre ater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Never use a fast battery charger to start the
engine, as this could damage the electronic sys-
tems of your vehicle, particularly the ignition and
engine fuel su pply control units.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessori es
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right re ar of
the engine co mpartment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
7
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in NEU-
TRAL) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection a nd personal
injury could result.
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry su ch as rings, watch
bands and bracele ts that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it
will be equipped with two batteries
page 167.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in per sonal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Positive (+) Battery Post
Positive (+) Battery Post (6.4 Engine)
Supplemental Battery – If Equipped
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or c hassi s, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cau se the battery to explode and could
result in per sonal injury.
CAUTION!
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connec tio ns. Failure to follow these pro-
cedures could result in damage to the charging sys-
tem of the boo ster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the d is-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at an author ized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hea r steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radi ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Jump Starting Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
7
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
Turn the Air Conditioner (A/C) off. The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a s uppleme nt to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine coo ling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the park-
ing brake before activating the Manual Park Release.
In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat
with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat-
ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is
not secured by the parking brake, or by proper con-
nection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an u nsec ure d vehicle could lead to seri-
ous injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
See the following steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
manual park rele ase cover located in front of the
gear selector, to access the release tether strap.
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up until the release lever locks
into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now
out of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is securely con-
nected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Cover
Tether Strap
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, rele asing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and
to the left, into its original position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the release position the
access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn t he
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, push and hold the lock button on the gear selec-
tor. Then, shi ft back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or SECOND
(2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission),
while gently pressi ng the accelerator. Use the least
amount of acc eler ator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or rac-
ing the engine.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEU-
TRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press
the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE
(R).
•
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
page 225. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clut ch or transmissio n failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuc k vehicle.
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Vertical Released Position
Original Tether Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
7
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section d escr ibe s procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmi ssi on and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described
page 193.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
• Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
•TowinForward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains
is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, t he ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, follow the instruc-
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle
page 278.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode, not in the OFF mode.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer
case is oper able, the vehicle may be towed (in the for-
ward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
in PARK (P) (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions)
page 193.
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
•
Front o r rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignit io n in the OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommend ed to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow
strap.
WARNING!
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
•
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•
Failure to follow proper tow hook usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
•
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Tow straps are recom-
mended when towing the vehicle, chains may
cause vehicle damage.
•
The tow hooks must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are obstacles.
•
Do not use the tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
•
Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
•
Do not use the tow hooks to free a st uck vehicle
page 279.
•
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guide-
lines are not followed
page 280.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact.
page 254
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle.
page 255
Front Tow Hooks
Rear Tow Hook
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation cond it ions , the oil change indi-
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer towing, and extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is dis-
played. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display,
“Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odom-
eter and a single chime will sound, ind ic ati ng that an oil
change is necessa ry.
NOTE:
PHEV (If Equipped): Even though the vehicle may not
have been driven, both the fuel in the tank and oil in
the engine will still degrade over time. Additionally,
there will be a notification to the driver if the engine is
being run to maintain the oil and fu el systems.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indi cator
message after completing the schedu le d oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an author ized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described u nde r Instrument Clus-
ter Display
page 124.
NOTE:
Under no ci rcumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Check the windshi eld washer fluid level.
•
Check the tir e inflation pressu res and look for
unusual wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as
needed.
•
Check the funct ion of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
•
Change oil and filter.
•
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
•
Inspect 12 Volt battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
•
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
•
Inspect engine co oli ng system protection and hoses.
•
Inspect exhaust system.
282
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
•
Inspect engine ai r cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
•
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 910 111213 1415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXXXX XXX X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear
suspension, and replace if necessary.
XX X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
XX X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
XX X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine.
** XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:234567 8 910 111213 1415
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.** X
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler
(if equipped), power electronics
(if equipped), and battery (if equipped) cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever come s first.
XX
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
XX X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
XX X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — 6.4L
The Scheduled Mai ntenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages speci-
fied to protect the vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent
maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The instrument cluster display will display an “Oil
Change Required” message and a single chime will
sound, indicating that an oi l change is necessary.
Based on e ngine operation cond it io ns, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle ser-
viced as soo n as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor
the time si nce the last oil change. Change your vehi-
cle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil
change, even if the oil change i ndic ator message is
NOT illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no ci rcumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indi cator
message after completing the schedu le d oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an author ized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described u nde r Instrument Clus-
ter Display
page 124
Severe Duty All Models
Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and off-road envi-
ronment, or predominately at idle or very low engine
RPM are known as Severe Duty vehicles. It is recom-
mended that you change engine oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Check the windshi eld washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•
Check tire pre ssu re and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the termi-
nals as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
engine oil, bra ke master cylinder, and add as
needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs
before sche dule d maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the fol-
lowing: dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
XXXXX
Drain the transfer case and refill. XXXXX
Inspect the accessory drive belts,
replace if necessary.
XX
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
Change if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, sus-
tained high speed driving, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
XXXXXX
286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and
all parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. XXXXX
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine.
**
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months if not done at
150,000 miles (240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.0L PHEV ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Battery Co olant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 10 — Intercooler/Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — 12 Volt Battery
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coola nt Pressure Cap— If Equipped
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the corr ect level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, s uch as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oi l while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level withi n the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the re adi ng is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aera-
tion or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid rese rvoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The flu id
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure
to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the res-
ervoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When re filli ng the washer fluid reservoir,
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range o f your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam-
mable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large a mou nts of water
page 274.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output gre ater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessori es
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. B oth the main and
the supplemental ba tteries must be d isc onne cted
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
•
It is essenti al when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negat ive (-) and are identified o n the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of c orrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to completely
de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
•
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge
in the system, r esu lti ng in damage to essential
electrical components.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pre ssur e
washer is not reco mmende d.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being asse sse d against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil select io n
page 346.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after startup
and then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds.
This is normal and will not harm the engine. This char-
acteristic can be caused by short drive c ycles. For
example, if the vehicle is started then shut off after
driving a short distance. Upon restarting, you may expe-
rience a ti cki ng sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an
extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil
changes or extended idling. If the engine continues to
tick or if the Malfunctio n Indicator Light (MIL) comes on,
see the nea rest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can dama ge your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the corr ect SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used o il and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are unavailable,
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Fil-
ter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 282.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Dut y Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air indu cti on system (air cleane r, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) re moved. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters
should be use d.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air clea ner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is pr ese nt before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suita ble tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
First Water Separation Chamber
Removal — 6.4L Engine
The vehicle is equipped with a hood duct system for
filtering out water, dirt and debris to keep them out of
the engine air cleaner filter. The first water separation
chamber can be removed for cleaning if necessary.
Removal
1. Loosen the six captured fasteners from the first
water separation chamber using a suitable tool.
NOTE:
The captured fasteners are made to stay with the
first water separation chamber and must NOT be
removed.
2. Pull on the hood duct at the top to disengage the
push pin clip along with the rubber grommet and
remove from vehicle.
Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is pres-
ent before reinstallation.
1. Align the first water separation chamber to hood/
second chamber then engage the push pin clip and
grommet.
NOTE:
Both components should click-in. The cone shape of
the second c hamber can aid in locating parts.
2. Hand start the six captured fasteners.
3. Tighten the captured fasteners. Do not over t ighten.
First Water Separation Chamber
1 — Captured Fasteners
First Water Chamber Removal
First Water Separation Chamber
1 — Push Pin
2 — Grommet (On The Backside)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — 6.4L Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Plan in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the air cleaner cover
using a suita ble tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cle aner filter by rotating at the hinge and
pulling the cover away from the engine.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is pr ese nt before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suita ble tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can st art at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge a nd the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a ser-
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accesso ry drive belts, small cracks that
run across the ribbed surface of the belt, from rib to rib,
are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace
a belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a ri b
must be replaced . Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Conditions that would require replacement:
•
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
•
Rib or belt wear
•
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
•
Belt slips
•
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
•
Belt broken
•
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or r umble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and c orr ect problem before new belt is
installed.
Some conditions can be cause d by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some mod els requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-
viced at an authorized de aler.
Engine Air Cleaner Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be chec ked and serviced by an aut hor ized
dealer at t he start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fi ns and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refri ger ants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
•
The air condi ti oning system contains re fri gera nt
under high pres sure . To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be do ne by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the che micals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer using recovery and re cycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignitio n is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fre sh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that sec ur e the air
filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.
Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the
right for clearance.
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identif ied with an arrow to indi-
cate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result i n the need to
replace it mo re often.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure retain-
ing tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into posi-
tion ensuring you have properly engaged the travel
dampener.
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
page 282.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, d oor hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clea n to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching co mponents to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lu bric ated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasi ve cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-
tions are pr ese nt, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
•
Wear or uneven edges
•
Foreign material
•
Hardening or cracking
•
Deformation or fatigue
Air Filter
Travel Dampener
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new uni t. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm o r blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without t he wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wi per blade off o f the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To d ise ngage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
push the rele ase tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wipe r arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off o f the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper blade
outward to disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off o f the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to
place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail gate.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connecti ons could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain car-
bon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and o do r-
less. Breathing it can make you u nconsc iou s and
can eventually poison you
page 265.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact wi th your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic co nverter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfi re or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
(Continued)
CAUTION!
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal o per ati ng conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result i n civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual sit uat io ns involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalys t overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained i mmed iately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods duri ng very rough
idle or malf unct io ning operating condit io ns.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap whe n the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine i s running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine , battery (if equipped), i ntercooler
(if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
(if equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine, battery (if equipped), inter-
cooler (if e quipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant is
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose ver t ica lly down the face of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine , battery (if equipped), i ntercooler
(if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system
hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight-
ness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle
and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifree ze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
page 282.
Electric/Battery Coolant System — PHEV
(If Equipped)
These coolant systems must be serviced by an autho-
rized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is speci-
fied on the reservoir, contact an authorized dealer for
service.
These systems require the use of high purity water,
such as deio nized , or distilled water, when mixing the
water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of
lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the cooling systems. If the coolant level of
the battery coolant system is low, the Hybrid Electric
Vehicle System Service Light will be illuminated on the
instrument cluster.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
page 346.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifre eze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-bas ed engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is neede d to be a dde d to the system please con-
tact an autho ri zed dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the r equirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
•
We r eco mmend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and di sti lled water.
Use higher conce ntr ati ons (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The u se of lower quality water will reduce
the amount o f corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize
spillage onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid
that is spilled onto the top of the engine should be
removed using compressed air or an absorbent
cloth.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is neede d to be a dde d to the system, please
contact an aut hor ized dealer.
•
Mixing engine co olant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refi ll with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will r etu rn to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or
HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper dis-
posal. Check with your local authorities to determine
the disposal r ule s for your community. To prevent inges-
tion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-
based coolant i n open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles o n the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in t he bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is no r-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat ope ns, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of ra di ator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coola nt freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pre ssur e tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermosta t. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissio ns.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 282.
WARNING!
Riding the bra kes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity i n an emergency.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, ad d
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the
side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing cap. With di sc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Br ake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the
brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks
page 347.
WARNING!
•
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
page 347. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moistur e from
the air re sult ing in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, re sult ing in sudden brake failure.
This could re sult in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This cou ld result in a collision.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior sur faces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm)
below the bottom edge o f the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by
the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer recommended fluid
page 347.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 282.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
page 347.
Transfer Case
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The flui d
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and
a point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below
the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal o per ati ng conditions, the fluid insta lled at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the flui d as recommended in the Maintenance
Plan. Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
page 282.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended manual
transmission fluid page 347.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recomme nde d against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineer ed product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the trans-
mission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals c an damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipsti ck. An autho ri zed dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmissio n fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal o per ati ng conditions, the fluid insta lled at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubricatio n for the
life o f the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
page 347. It is i mportant to maintain the transmis-
sion fluid at the corre ct level using the r eco mmend ed
fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushe s should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmissi on fluid other than the manufac-
turer recommended fluid may cause de terioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
page 347.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the origi nal fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. The us e of a
fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous ele ctri cal system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
WARNING!
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in se rio us personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-
tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you mu st check the fuse
element inside the blade f use for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Centers (PDC) are located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
tains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC
top cover is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay
location, function, and size.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electri cal system failure.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functi ona l fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Power Distribution Center Location (6.4 Engine)
308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
GASOLINE ENGINE FUSES
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare *
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR / FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare *
F07 – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump *
F08 – 15 Amp Blue TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare *
F10 – 15 Amp Blue ESCL
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Por t (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare *
F14 – – Spare *
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IPC / Switch Bank-HD Elec
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – – Spare *
F18 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F19 – – Spare *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
F22 – 10 Amp Red ECM / ETC
F23 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F24 30 Amp Pink – Pass Pwr Seat
F25 – 10 Amp Red MOD_SBW
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 30 Amp Pink – Power Step/Slider
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red HVAC CTRL MOD / SCL / OCM / DPDM
F33 – 10 Amp Red PTS / IRCM / Airbag Disable Lamps
F34 – 10 Amp Red ESC / EHPS / SBCM Wake Up
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP *
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW ELEC BRK MOD *
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W *
F38 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F39 – – Spare *
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DTCM / Axle Lock FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue IC / SGW Wake Up
F42 – 10 Amp Red PCR Ctrl Feed (ESS) *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN *
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD / LVL MTR / HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare *
F48 – – Spare *
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC *
F51 – 10 Amp Red Digital TV Inline / USB / ISRVM / Compass Mod
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR Temp Sesr /PTC Htr Co il Feed
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seats
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seats
F59 30 Amp Pink – Driver Pwr Seat
F60 – 15 Amp Blue CSWM (Htd Str Wheel)
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LBSS / RBSS / CADM-LO *
F62 – 10 Amp Red Exhaust Sol *
F63 – 10 Amp Red ORC
F64 – – Spare *
F65 – – Spare *
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Mtr Front
F67 – – Spare *
F68 – – Spare *
F69 – 10 Amp Red KIN / RF Hub
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ / IGN COIL
F71 – – Spare *
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG *
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
F75 – – Spare *
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mi rrors
F78 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Mod / SIREN / Intrusion Snsrs
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow Smart Bar Ctrl Mod
F80 – 15 Amp Blue SOL 1,2 BLOCK SHIFT *
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost (EBL)
F82 – – Spare *
F83 – – Spare *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F84 – – Spare *
F85 – – Spare *
F86 – – Spare *
F87 – – Spare *
F88 – – Spare *
F89 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Ctl / DTV / EVIC / Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lmp *
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Port
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red Pwr Mirror SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC / OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare *
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & Valves
F101 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F102 – 15 Amp Blue TBM2 / DCSD Mod
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 *
F104 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar SW (Driver & Pass)
F105 – 10AmpRed ICS/HVAC/ETC
F106 50 Amp Red – ESC -Pump Mtr
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Stop/Turn LT *
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 *
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Stop/Turn RT *
F110 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F111 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow B ackup *
312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PHEV FUSES
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 5 Amp Tan HV Electric Coolant Heater Enable
F02 – – Spare*
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR / FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – 15 Amp Blue BPCM
F07 – 15 Amp Blue PECP-2 (LTR COOLANT PUMP)
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – 5 Amp Tan IDCM
F10 – 15 Amp Blue ESCL
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Por t (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – 10 Amp Red PIM - Redundant Main Pwr Supply
F14 – 10 Amp Red PIM - Main Pwr Supply
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IPC / Switch Bank-HD ELEC
F16 – – Spare*
F17 40 Amp Green – Trans Oil Pump
F18 – 10 Amp Red Electric Air Conditioning Compressor
F19 – 5 Amp Tan Charge Port Indicator
F20 30 Amp Pink – CBC 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper *
F22 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PIM / ETC
F23 – – Spare*
F24 30 Amp Pink – Pass Power Seat
F25 – 10 Amp Red MOD_SBW
F26 40 Amp Green – CBC 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – CBC 3-POWER LOCKS
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F29 40 Amp Green – CBC 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 30 Amp Pink – Power Step Slider *
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC CTRL MOD / Steering Column Lock (SCL) / Occu pant Classifi-
cation Module (OCM) / Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red PTS / IRCM MODULE
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) / Electric Hydrau lic Power Steering
(EHPS) / Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 – – Spare*
F36 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake Mod
F37 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Conn 7W
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – – Spare*
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM) / Axle Lock FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC) / Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – – Spare*
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD / LVL MTR / HDLP SW
F47 – 10 Amp Red QVPM - Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module
F48 – 10 Amp Red Spare*
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC
F51 – 10 Amp Red DTV / USB / ISRVM / Compass Mod / Inverter 400W */ ECM / PIM
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red CVPM
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seats
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seats
F59 30 Amp Pink – Driver Power Seat
F60 – 15 Amp Blue HTD STR WHEEL
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LBSS / RBSS / CADM-LO *
F62 – – Spare *
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare *
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Mtr Front
F67 – 15 Amp Blue BCP - Lo Temp Active Pump
F68 – – Spare*
F69 – 10 Amp Red KIN / RF Hub
F70 – 25 Amp Clear IGN COIL / FUEL INJECTOR
F71 – 10 Amp Red Battery Coolant Heater
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT *
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT *
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Charge Indicator / Sw Bank PHEV Mode
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mi rrors
F78 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion Mod / Siren / Intrusion Sensors *
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow Smart Bar CTRL Mod
F80 – 15 Amp Blue SOL 1 2 Block Shift / Mod ELCM / SOL Fuel Tank Isolation
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F82 – – Spare*
F83 50 Amp Red – ESC-ECU & Valves
F84 20 Amp Blue – PIM - High Side Drive Power
F85 – 15 Amp Blue PECP - Lo Temp Passive Pump
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F86 – – Spare *
F87 – 15 Amp Blue AHP - Hi Temp Aux Pump
F88 – – Spare *
F89 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / CRUISE CTL / EVIC / DTV / AIRBAG DISABLE LMP
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1
F94 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Port
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC / OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare*
F100 – – Spare*
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue TBM2 / DCSD Mod
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3
F104 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar SW (Drive & Pass)
F105 – 10AmpRed ICS/HVAC/ETC
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)-PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP / TURN LT
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP / TURN RT
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER 150W
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 batter y fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an author ized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) **
Soundbar Dome L amp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric con-
ditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back
into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually acceler-
ate the clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one
side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to
the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter tur n
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock positi on.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil con-
tamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in cont act with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcoho l.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter
turn clockwise.
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter tu rn counter-
clockwise and r emove from housing. Pull the bulb
straight from the socket to replace.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electric al connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical
connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
HALOGEN FRONT FOG LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
front fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unloc k the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil con-
tamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in cont act with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcoho l.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND
BACKUP LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access single
retaining screw for tail lamp assembly.
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical
connector, then remove tail lamp assembly from the
vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located
inboard behind the lamp housing.
3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket to
access bulb soc kets.
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn coun-
terclockwise, then remove it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Wheel Liner
Trim Cap
Bulb Removal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the swing gate behind the spare tire. If
service is needed, obtain the LED Assembly from an
authorized dealer.
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and dis-
connect electrical connector.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the previously mentioned
procedure. When installing the new bulb, care should
be taken to not allow bare skin to come in contact with
the bulb.
See an author ized dealer to replace LED lamps.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Load ing.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with bead-lock wheels,
please refer to your vehicles bead-lock specific part
number for additional information and instructions on
mopar.com or by contacting an authorized de aler.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall pre ced ing the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the sec ti on width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the si ze designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporar y high pressure com-
pact spare tir es have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Tract io n and
Temperature Grades
320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of se cti on height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Constructio n code
•
"R" means radia l construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical c ode associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicat ing the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side.
Tires with white sidewalls will have t he full TIN, includ-
ing the date c ode , located on the white sidewall side of
the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mo unted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found
on the outbo ard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manu facturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could re prese nt the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire i nflati on pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or dri ven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflat ion pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflati on pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-
ment tire sizes and the recommended co ld tire inflatio n pressures.
322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driv-
er’s side B-pi llar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflat io n pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load car rying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Lo ad-
ing Information Placard
page 187.
NOTE:
Under a maximu m loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
page 187.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and ca rgo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
(5)
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating conf igur ati ons and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and loa d carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and ca rgo should never exceed 865 lb
(392 kg).
324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper ti re pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage t hat result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel cons umption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflatio n pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfor t able ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pre ssur e is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressu re with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem c ap. This will prevent mois-
ture and d irt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage t he valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven le ss than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflati on pressure must not exceed
the maximum i nflati on pressure molde d into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pre ssu res more often if subject to a wide
range of out do or temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checki ng tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in t he Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are s uch that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Incr ease d tire pressur e and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, lo adi ng and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed dri ving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious colli sio n.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability c ou ld cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tir es in sets of four. Never combi ne them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repair ed if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture i s no greater than ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an autho ri zed tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the ti re pressure sens or as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss o f infla-
tion pressure. This rapid los s of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96
kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it
has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being d ri ven in a
Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire conditio n.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Moni toring System section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information page 279.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment t ir es
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread i s worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be re placed .
For further information
page 328.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abno rmal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven.
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when install-
ing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismou nted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, greas e, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph
on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this sec tio n. Refer to the
Tire And Loa ding Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certificat ion Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index a nd Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to t he Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 321.
It is recomme nde d to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels .
It is recomme nde d you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
(Continued)
WARNING!
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity, other than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate spe ed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a di fferent size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tire s provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M& S, M/S or MS designation
on the tir e sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow t ir es
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent
in size and type to t he original equipment
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; fail-
ure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed r ati ngs than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflat io n pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than t hat of non-studde d tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Ser vice Kit instead o f a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 191.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and functi on to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this ti re has limited tr ead life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repai re d (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover o r attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is desi gned specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare ti re
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spar e tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear a xle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This labe l contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of thi s limited use spar e tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side d oo r. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neut ral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with t he
same soap solut io n recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium c hlori de , magnesium chloride , calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or co ntrol dus t on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wi pe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemi cals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic c ar washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care mu st be taken in the selection of
tire and whe el cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the whee l's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this fi nish.
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of tracti on devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these rec-
ommendations to guard against damage.
•
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as re comme nde d by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
•
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
•
Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
Gasoline Engines
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Rear
245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
LT285/75R17C
LT315/70R17C
Autosock
Sahara 255/70R18
Rubicon
LT255/75R17C
LT285/70R17C
LT315/70R17C
Rubicon 392 LT315/70R17C
Summit 275/55R20
PHEV Engine
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Rear
275/55R20
LT285/70R17C
Autosock
Sahara
255/70R18
275/55R20
Summit 275/55R20
Rubicon
LT255/75R17C
LT285/70R17C
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
8
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension co mponents,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause seri -
ous damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that c ould indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged part s of the device before
further use.
•
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
•
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, operat-
ing speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 282.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires o f equal size, type, and circumference on
each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRA DES
The Traction grade s, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditi ons on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades ar e A (the
highest), B, and C, representing t he
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Sta ndard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated a nd not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and poss ible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry su ch as rings, watch
bands and bracele ts that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
•
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. B oth the main and
the supplemental ba tteries must be d isc onne cted
to completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical
system.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
8
WARNING!
•
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in
the system, resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system
then disconnect both the main and supplemental
negative battery cables.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fre sh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to mi nimi ze the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
•
If assistance i s needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an au tho ri zed dealer.
NOTE:
•
You must isolate the supplemental battery connec-
tion point, a s well as the main battery terminal from
the post, as shown in the image, to fully de-energize
both batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to
disconnect the battery system, see an authorized
dealer.
•
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not function for
up to 24 hour s, due to the IBS being set into learn
mode.
STORING THE VEHICLE — PHEV
(IF EQUIPPED)
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
•
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location with the windows open slightly.
•
Check that the parking brake is not engaged.
•
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the 12 Volt battery will prevent the
High Voltage (HV) battery from accepting a charge
from the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE).
Also, the vehicle will not condition the HV battery (if
needed and connected to a powered EVSE). If the
HV battery is not able to condition itself and it
becomes cold enough (or hot enough), the vehicle
will not start until the HV battery’s cell temperatures
are between -22°F (-30°C) and 122°F (50°C).
•
If you do not disconnect the battery from the electri-
cal system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
•
Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on
and high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrica-
tion of the system, thus mini mizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
back into operation.
•
Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever
possible.
Battery Cable Disconnect
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Bat tery Sensor (IBS)
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
The hybrid has a feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every three weeks. This feature charges the
12 Volt battery from the HV battery. This will happen as
long as the HV battery remains above the minimum
state of charge
page 146.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemic als that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, a nd underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and there-
fore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by r insi ng.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and deca ls.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the oce an, hose off t he undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
8
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is co nsid er ed the responsibili ty of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized de aler has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
•
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage inte-
rior trim.
•
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on
top material, as damage may result.
•
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
•
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it i s completely dry before lowering.
•
Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds , lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is re quired, use Mopar® Con-
vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foam-
ing cleaner on the entire top, but support the top from
underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
•
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
•
It is recomme nde d that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
Careless handling a nd storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installati on can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
•
Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes i n wash-
ing stations. Wash the vehicle only by hand using
neutral pH detergents; dry it with a wet chamoi s
leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes should
not be used for cleaning the car.
•
Bird droppings must be washed off immediately
and thoroughly as the acid they co ntai n is particu-
larly aggressive.
•
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as,
when dried, i t may only be possible to remove
them with abrasi ve products and/or polishes,
which is highly inadvisable as they could alter t he
typical opaqueness of the paint.
•
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for clean-
ing the front windshi eld and rear window; dilute it
to a minimum of 50% water. Only use pure wind-
shield washer fluid when strictly necessar y due to
outside temperature conditions.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
•
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the win-
dow, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep® Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV pro-
tection to help prevent yellowing.
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such
as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
•
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
•
When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a
scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only
if you must clean the window quickly.
•
Debris (sand, mud/d irt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer opera-
tion. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle wash-
ing will eventually impact window plast ic retainer
operation. To maintain ease of use of the window
plastic retainers, each window plastic retainer
should be clea ned and lubricated regularly. Clean
them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to
the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the wind ows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
carpet that does not interfere with the o per ati o n of the
pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when the
carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it can-
not slip out of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
•
If operating t he vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
•
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or dam-
aged grommets may cause your carpet to interfere
with the acce lera tor, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach
your carpet using the grommets.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can beco me trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the carpet (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the carpet and may cause interference
with the acce lera tor, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install car pet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use manufacturer
approved carpet for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and chec k that the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each
pedal to check for interference with the accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor
mats.
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet
1—Grommets
Front Carpet Pulled Away
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
8
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for
the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet
split and then pull out the rear edge and slide the
carpet to the front (do not remove the harness).
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket
and then re move the last two grommets.
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one ri ght). First the grommet for the cargo car-
pet and t hen the rear carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the rear seats brackets.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Carpet Split
Front Seat And Floor
1 — Grommets
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and one
right). First t he grommet from the side carpet and
then the r e ar carpet.
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet
split around the se at belt attachment.
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the side
support and then pull the carpet out.
Side Carpet
1—Grommet
Pull Carpet To The Rear
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
Under Rear Seat
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
Rear Load Floor
1 — Side Support
2 — Load Floor
3 — Side Support
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
8
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the se at belt attachment and under the
center seat bracket.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then
all around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one
(left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then
all around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is
tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refas-
ten grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not r emove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry wi th a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
(Continued)
Under Rear Seat
1—Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
Inside Sidewall
1 — Top Flange
2—Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or a utho ri zed FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fre shene rs, insect repellent s,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limi ted Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle ar e
molded in cle ar plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soa p solution may be
used, but d o not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as need ed .
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cle aned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the lef t front corner of the A-pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the whee l is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorize d dealer recomme nde d lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the whee l mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose partic les.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 ft-lb
(80 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only authorize d dealer recomme nde d lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire, located on the
swing gate.
Tighten the lug nut s/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
Vehicle Identification Number
Wheel Mounting Surface
342
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the whee l.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in per sonal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating o n gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than recommended can cause engine
failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions requirements, and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance, when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline hav-
ing an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load condi-
tions such as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline hav-
ing an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded premium gasoline having a
posted octane number of 91 as specified by t he (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline is re quired in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline r eferred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended .
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stabi lity additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these addit ives will help i mprove
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
Torque Patterns
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 343
9
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel supplie rs blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage cr it ical fuel system compo-
nents, cause e missi ons to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline cont aini ng
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX
FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gaso-
line with highe r ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
Operate in a le an mode
•
OBD II Malfunctio n Indicator Light on
•
Poor engine performance
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in d amage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a
manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended wi th MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content o f gaso-
line may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the cat alyti c converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized d eale r for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhance rs, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high conc entr ati ons of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or ad di tives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result i n civil penalties being assessed against you.
344 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
4Xe Models 17.2 gal 65 L
Two Door Models 17.5 gal 66 L
Four Door Models 21.5 gal 81 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
6.4L Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 12 qt 11.4 L
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.7 qt 3.5 L
2.0L PHEV Battery Coolant (Contact an
authorized dealer for service)
5.6 qt 5.3 L
2.0L PHEV Power Electronics Coolant
(Contact an autho rize d dealer for service)
5.7 qt 5.4 L
3.6L Engine 13.4 qt 12.7 L
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 2.3 qt 2.2 L
3.6L Power Pack Unit (PPU) Coolant 3.3 qt 3.1 L
6.4L Engine 15.6 qt 14.8 L
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 345
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We r eco mmend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We r eco mmend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Battery, and Power Electric Coolant
We r eco mmend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We r eco mmend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must
have the API Donut trademark
page 293.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full syn-
thetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
page 293.
Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
We r eco mmend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthet ic Engine Oil which
meets the r equirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be u se d but must have the API Donut trade-
mark
page 293.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 6.4L Engine
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not
Use E-85).
346
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifre eze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
(Continued)
CAUTION!
gency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and re fille d with fresh OAT coolant (con-
forming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible .
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-bas ed engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engi ne coolant (antifree ze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the functio n or performance of your
transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We r eco mmend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front A xle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ) We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We r eco mmend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We r eco mmend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 347
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE A PPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the war-
ranty. Discuss additional charges with the service man-
ager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want d one . If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rent al
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it i s advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We st rongly reco mmend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most co nce rne d that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory -trai ned technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where
services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the s ervice provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
348
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing service s on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility, for services rendered
within30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include
your VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable a mount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to r ei mbur seme nt is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. B ox 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fu el (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We wi ll dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dis-
patch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram
dealer. If you choose to go to another de aler, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. B ox 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER
P.O. B ox 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. B ox 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 349
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special Telecommunicat io n
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the specia l needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If
you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within thr ee weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call t he manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Cana-
dian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract docu-
ments, and contac t the person listed in those
documents.
We a ppreci ate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemi cals known to the State
of California to cause cance r and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In additio n, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you beli eve that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traf-
fic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
Scan me
(US Residents only)
350 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety de fect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West B ui lding,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you be lieve t hat your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately.
Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fi x problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and corr ect problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a c omplete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagno sti c
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radi o Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Change Of Ownership Or Address
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. B ox 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 351
10
General Information
IRCM Module
Model / FCC ID: L2CO054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must acce pt any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Cet appareil e st conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada
a applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée à condition que l'appare il ne
produise pas de brouillage préjudiciable et qu'il accepte
tout brouillage, même celui susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
NOTE:
Changes or modif icat ions not expressively approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment. The term
“IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
NOTE:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits
set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equip-
ment should be installed and operated with mi nimu m
distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
352
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.................342
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ..............171,173
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze).........302
Adding Fuel .................184,185
Additives, Fuel ..................343
Adventure Guides .................220
Air Bag
Air Bag Opera tio n ...............247
Air Bag Warning Light ...........245,247
Enhanced Accident Response ......254, 281
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........281
FrontAirBag...............246,247
If Deployment Occurs .............253
Knee Impact Bolsters .............251
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........255
Maintenance .................255
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......245
Transporting Pets ...............265
Air Bag Light ..............133,245,266
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . .294
Air Conditioner Maintenance............297
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.............297
Air Conditioner System...............297
Air Conditioning Filter .............77,297
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........77
Air Conditioning System ...............76
Air Filter......................294
Air Pressure
Tires .....................326
Alarm
Arm The System ................40
Disarm The System ...............41
Rearm The System ...............41
Security Alarm ...............40, 136
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........301,345
Disposal ...................302
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........223
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..............136
Assist, Hill Sta rt ..................228
Audio Systems (Radio)...............201
Auto Down Power Windows .............83
Automatic Dimming Mirror .............66
Automatic Door Locks................44
Automatic Headlights ................71
Automatic High Beams ...............
71
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........76
Automatic Transmission ..............152
Adding Fluid ..................305
Fluid And Fi lter Change ............305
Fluid Change .................305
Fluid Level Check ...............305
Fluid Type ................305, 347
Gear Ranges .................152
Special Additives ...............305
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....153
AutoPark.....................144
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......80
Auxiliary Power Outlet ................80
Auxiliary Switches..................81
Axle Fluid .....................347
Axle Lock .....................158
B
Battery .................15,134,292
Charging ....................20
Charging System Light .............134
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........32
Belts, Seat ....................266
Blind Spot Monitoring ...............230
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........298
B-Pillar Location..................323
Brake Assist System ................224
Brake Control System ...............224
Brake Fluid .................304, 347
Brake System ................303, 342
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................342
Fluid Check ..................304
Master Cylinder ................304
Parking ....................148
Warning Light .................134
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........151
Bulb Replacement ..............317,318
Bulbs, Light .................267, 317
BumperEndCapRemoval.............195
C
Camera, Rear ...................182
Capacities, Fluid .................345
Caps, Filler
Fuel......................184
Oil (Engine) ..................288
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........302
Carbon Monoxide Warning.............267
Cargo Load Flo or .................117
353
11
Cargo Tie-Downs .................117
Carpeting .....................337
Car Washes ....................335
Cellular Phone...................217
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..........320
Certificati on Label .................187
Chains, Tire ....................331
Charging ......................20
Chart, Tire Sizing .................321
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .142
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........265
Checks, Safety ..................265
Child Restraint ..................255
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................257
Child Seat Installat io n .............263
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....261
Infant And Child Restraints ...........256
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........260
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . .258
Older Children And Child Restraints ......256
Seating Positions ...............257
Clean Air Gasoli ne .................343
Cleaning
Wheels ....................330
Climate Control
Automatic ...................74
Cold Weather Operation ..............145
Compact Spare Tire ................329
Connector
UCI.......................79
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......79
Console ......................78
Floor ......................78
Contract, Service .................350
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........302
Cooling System ..................301
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........302
Coolant Level ..............302, 303
Cooling Capacity ...............345
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........302
Drain, Flush, And Refill .............301
Inspection .............301,302, 303
Points To Remember .............303
Pressure Cap
.................302
Radiat
or Cap .................302
Selection Of Co olant (Antifreeze) . .301, 345, 346
Corrosion Protection ................335
Cruise Control (Speed Co ntrol) ........171,173
Cruise Light .................140,141
Customer Assistance ...............348
Customer Programmable Features .........201
Cybersecurity ...................201
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............71
Dealer Service ..................293
Defroster, Windshield ...............266
De-Icer
Remote Start ..................38
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............73
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............141
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ....................72
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................292
Disable Vehicle Towing ..............280
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........302
Door Ajar ..................134,136
Door Ajar Li ght ................134,136
Door Frame ....................110
Installation ..................110
Removal ...................110
Door Locks
Automatic ...................44
Door Off Mirror Kit .................49
Door Off Mirror Kit If Equipped
.........49
Doors .......................41
Removal ..................45, 47
Removal,Front.................45
Removal,Rear .................47
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt..............57,58
Driving ......................195
Dual Mode Exhau st ................161
E
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......80
Electrical Power Outlets ...............80
Electric Brake Control System ...........224
Anti-Lock Brake System ............223
Electronic Roll Mitigation .........225, 230
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........225
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......134
Emergency
In Case Of ...................268
SOS Emergency Call ..............268
Emergency Brake .................148
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ....................270
Jump Starting .................274
Tow Hooks ..................281
Emission Control System Maintenance .......142
Engine ......................288
Air Cleaner ..................294
Break-In Recommendations ..........147
Checking Oil Level ...............292
Compartment.........288, 289, 290, 291
Compartment Identification . .288, 289, 290, 291
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............346
354
INDEX
Cooling ....................301
Exhaust Gas Caut ion .............267
Fails To Start .................145
Flooded, Starting ...............145
Fuel Requirements ............343, 345
Jump Starting .................274
Oil .................293, 345, 346
Oil Filler Cap .................288
Oil Filter ....................294
OilReset ...................125
Oil Selection ...............293, 345
Oil Synthetic .................293
Overheating ..................277
Starting .................143,146
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . .254, 281
Ethanol ......................344
Exhaust Gas Caut ion ...............267
Exhaust Gas Caut ions ...............267
Exhaust System ...............267, 300
Exterior Lights .................70, 267
F
Fabric Care ....................336
Fabric Top.....................336
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................294
Air Conditioning ..............77,297
Engine Oil ...................294
Engine Oil Disposa l ..............294
Flashers
Hazard Warning ................268
Turn Signal ..................267
Turn Signals ...............140,319
Flash-To-Pass ....................71
Flat Tire Changing ..............320, 329
Flat Tire Stowage...............320, 329
Flooded Engine Starting ..............145
Fluid, Brake ....................347
Fluid Capacities ..................345
Fluid Leaks ....................267
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission .............305
Fluid Level Checks ................304
Brake .....................304
Engine Oil ...................292
Fog Lights ...................72, 319
Fog Lights, Service ................319
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .............61
Fold-Flat Seats ...................57
Folding Rear Seats .................59
Folding Windshield ................113
Forward Collision Warning .............234
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............268
Four Wheel Drive .................154
Operation ................154,155
Shifting ....................154
System ....................154
Four Wheel Drive Operation ............156
Freedom Panels ..................102
Front A xle (Differential) ..............304
Fuel .......................343
Adding ..................184,185
Additives ...................343
Clean Air ...................343
Ethanol ....................344
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..............
184
Gasoline ...................343
Materials Added ................343
Methanol ...................344
Octane Rating ..............343, 346
Requirements .................345
Specifications .................346
Tank Capacity .................345
Fueling ...................184,185
Fuses.......................305
G
Garage Door Ope ner (HomeLink) ..........67
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ........184,185,187
Gasoline, Clean Ai r ................343
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................343
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............343
Gear Ranges .................149,152
Glass Cleaning ..................341
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .........188,189
GVWR.......................187
H
Half-Door Installation ................50
Half-Door Installation
.............51
Half-Door Mirror Installation .............55
HardTop......................83
Hazard Warning Flasher s .............268
Headlights
Automatic ...................71
Bulb Replacement ...............318
Cleaning ...................335
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......71
Lights On Reminder ...............71
Passing .....................71
Replacing ...................318
Head Restraints ..................63
Heated Mirrors ...................67
Heated Seats....................62
Heated Steering Wheel ...............56
Heavy-Duty Use ..................285
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch....71
High Voltage Battery ................15
INDEX 355
11
Hill Descent Co ntrol ................227
Hill Descent Co ntrol Indi cator ...........227
Hill Start Assist ..................228
Hitches
Trailer Towing .................190
HomeLink (Garage Do or Opener) ..........67
Hood Prop ....................115
Hood Release ...................115
I
Ignition.......................34
Keyless Ignition PHEV ..............35
Switch .....................34
In Case Of Emergency ...............268
Inside Rearview Mirror ...............66
Instrument Cluster ..............119,123
Descriptions ..................140
Display ....................124
Engine Oil Reset ................125
Menu Items ..................129
Instrument Cluster
..............120
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........341
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) .........306
Interior And Instrument Lights............72
Interior Appearance Care .............337
Interior Lights ...................72
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .........73
Inverter
Power .....................81
J
Jacking And Tire Changing
..........270
Jacking Instructions ................272
Jack Location ...................271
Jack Operation ..................272
Jump Starting ...................274
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ................40
Disarm The System ...............41
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........33
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .32
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....33
Keyless Enter'n Go™ ................42
Passive Entry ..................42
Keys........................31
Replacement ..................33
L
Lane Change Assist .................72
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................240
Latches ......................267
Hood ..................115,135
Leaks, Fluid ....................267
Life O f Tires ....................328
Light Bulbs..................267, 317
Lighted Cupholders .................79
Lights.......................267
AirBag...............133,245,266
Automatic Headlights ..............71
Brake Assist Warning .............226
Brake Warning ................134
Bulb Replacement ............317,318
Center Mounted Stop .............320
Courtesy/Reading ...............72
Cruise ..................140,141
Daytime Running ................71
Dimmer Switch .................72
Dimmer Switch, He adli ght ............72
Electric Power Steering ............134
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator .................135,136
Exterior ..................70, 267
Fog....................72, 319
Fuel Filler Cap .................137
Hazard Warning Flasher ............268
Headlights ..................318
High Beam ...................71
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..........71
Hill Descent Co ntrol Indi cator .........227
Interior .....................72
Lights On Reminder ...............71
LowFuel ...................137
Low Washer Fluid ...............137
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......137
Oil Temperature ................135
Park .....................140
Passing .....................71
Rear Servicing .................319
RearTailLamps................319
Seat Belt Reminder ..............136
Security Alarm .................136
Service ..................317,318
Side Marker ..................319
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........235
Traction Control ................226
Transmission Temperature ...........136
Turn Signal ..................267
Turn Signals
...............140,319
W
arning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ...............135,140
Load Floor, Cargo .................117
Loading Vehicle ..................187
Tires .....................323
Load Shed Bat tery Saver Mode ..........132
356
INDEX
Load Shed Bat tery Saver On ............132
Load Shed Elect ri cal Load Reduction........132
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........132
Locking
Axle ......................158
Locks
Automatic Door .................44
Child Protection .................44
Manual .....................41
Power Door ...................42
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position
..................84
Low Tire Pressure System .............235
Lubrication, Body .................298
Luggage Carrier ..................117
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................342
M
Maintenance ...................107
Maintenance Free Battery .............292
Maintenance Schedule............282, 285
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .137, 142
Manual
Park Release .................278
Service ....................351
Manual Transmission ............149,305
Fluid Level Check ...............305
Lubricant Selection ............305, 347
Shift Speeds .................149
Methanol .....................344
Mirrors.......................66
Automatic Dimming ...............66
Heated .....................67
Outside .....................66
Rearview....................66
Vanity .....................66
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........235
Mopar Parts ...................350
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............147
O
Occupant Restraints................239
Octane Rating, Gas oline (Fuel) ........343, 346
Off Road Pages ..................217
Accessory Gauges ............217,218
Drivetrain ................217,218
Pitch And Roll ..............217,218
Status Bar ...................217
Oil Change Reset If Equipped
.........125
Oil, Engine ..................293, 346
Capacity ...................345
Checking ...................292
Dipstick ....................292
Disposal ...................294
Filter .....................294
Filter Disposal .................294
Identification Logo ...............293
Materials Added To ..............294
Pressure Warning Light ............135
Recommendation ............293, 345
Synthetic ...................293
Viscosity ...................345
Oil Filter, Change .................294
Oil Filter, Selecti on ................294
Oil Pressure Light .................135
OilReset.....................125
Onboard Diagnostic System ............141
Operating Precautions ...............141
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................351
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..............66
Overheating, Engine ................277
P
Paddle Shifters ..................154
Paint Care ....................335
Panic Alarm ....................32
Parking Brake ...................148
ParkSense System, Rear..............179
Passive Entry ....................42
Pedestrian Warning System ............223
Pets .......................265
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......323
Power
Brakes ....................342
Door Locks ...................42
Inverter.....................81
Mirrors.....................67
Seats ......................57
Steering ....................167
Windows ....................82
Power Sliding Top .................107
Operation ...................107
Pinch Protect .................107
Quarter Window Removal ...........109
Power Steering Fluid................347
Power Top Quarter Windows ............109
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..........243
Preparation For Jacking ..............271
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................243
Profile Settings ..................203
INDEX 357
11
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................327
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)........302
Radio Operation ..................217
Radio Remote Controls ..............217
Rear Axle (Differential)...............304
RearCamera...................182
RearCrossPath..................232
Rear ParkSense System ..............179
Rear Seat Reminder Alert .............224
Rear Swing Gate .................116
Rear Wiper/Washer .................74
Recreational Towing ................193
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....194
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....194
Reformulated Gasoline ..............343
Refrigerant ....................297
Release, Hood ..................115
Reminder, Seat Be lt ................240
Remote Control
Starting System .................37
Remote Keyless Entry ................31
Arm The Alarm .................40
Disarm The Alarm ................41
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........33
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......217
Remote Start
Exit (PHEV) ...................39
Remote Start (Gas) .................37
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............37
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .38
Uconnect Settings ...............38
Remote Starting System ............37,38
Remote Start (PHEV) ................38
Removable Doors ................45, 47
Front......................45
Rear......................47
Removable Top ..................107
Removing The Soft Top
.............96
Replacement Bulbs ................317
Replacement Keys .................33
Replacement Tires ................328
Reporting Safety Defects .............350
Restraints, Child..................255
Restraints, Head ..................63
Roll Over Warning ..................8
Roof Type Carrier .................117
Rotation, Tires ..................332
S
Safety Che cks Inside Vehicle............266
Safety Che cks Outside Vehicle ...........267
Safety De fects, Reporting .............350
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................267
Safety Information, Tire ..............320
Safety Tips ....................265
Scheduled Servicing................285
Schedule, Maintenance ..............282
Seat Belt Reminder ................136
Seat Belts ..................240,266
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............242
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....242
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .242
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......244
Child Restraints ................255
Extender ...................243
Front Se at ................240,241
Inspection ..................266
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..........241
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............240
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........242
Operating Instructions .............241
Pregnant Women ...............243
Pretensioners .................243
Rear Seat ...................240
Reminder ...................240
Seat Belt Extender ...............243
Seat Belt Pr etensioner .............243
Untwisting Procedure .............242
Seat Belts Mai ntenance ..............340
Seats .......................57
Adjustment .................57,58
Easy Entry ...................59
FoldAndTumbleRear..............61
Heated .....................62
Height Adjustment ...............58
Lumbar Adjustment ...............58
Power .....................57
Rear Folding ..................57
Tilting .....................57
Security Alarm.................40, 136
Arm The System ................40
Disarm The System ...............41
Selec - Speed Control ...............229
Selection Of Co olant (Antifreeze) ..........346
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............33
Sentry Key Replacement
..............33
Ser
vice Assistance ................348
Service Contract .................350
Service Manuals .................351
Settings......................201
Shifting ......................151
Automatic Transmission .........151,152
Manual Transmission .............149
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..................194
358
INDEX
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..................194
Shoulder Belts ..................240
Side Step Removal ................195
Signals, Turn ..............140,267, 319
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............331
Snow Tires ....................329
SoftTop....................83, 91
Soft Top Windows
...............91
Spare Tires ...............272,329, 330
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................346
Oil ......................346
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..................172
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............175
Cancel ....................172
Resume ....................172
Speed Control (Cruise Co ntrol) ...........173
Starting ...................143,146
Automatic Transmission ............143
Button .....................34
Cold Weather .................145
Engine Fails To Start ..............145
Manual Transmission .............143
Remote.....................37
Starting And Operating ............143,146
Starting Procedures .............143,146
Steering
Power.....................167
Tilt Column ...................56
Wheel, Heated .................56
Wheel, Tilt ...................56
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........217
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ....................217
Stop/Start ..................167,169
Storage ..................78, 91, 109
Behind the Seat ................78
Storage, Vehicle ...............333, 334
Storing Your Vehicle .............333, 334
Sunrider® For Hard Top ..............105
SunRoof.....................107
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic ...................159
Sway Control, Trailer ................230
Swing Gate, Rear .................116
Synthetic Engine Oil ................293
System, Remote Starting ..............37
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............56
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........76
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..............117
Tilt Steering Column ................56
Tire And Loa ding Information Placard .......323
Tire Markings ...................320
Tires ...............267, 326, 329, 332
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............328
Air Pressure ..................326
Chains ....................331
Changing ...................270
Compact Spare ................329
General Information ...........326, 329
High Speed ..................327
Inflation Pressure ...............326
Life O f Tires ..................328
Load Capacity .................323
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .138, 235
Quality Grading ................332
Radial .....................327
Replacement .................328
Rotation ...................332
Safety..................320, 326
Sizes .....................321
Snow Tires ..................329
Spare Tires .............272,329,330
Spinning ...................327
Tread Wear Indicators .............327
Wheel Nut Torque ...............342
Tire Safety Information ..............320
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........191
To Open Hood ...................115
Top
Dual ......................83
Hard......................83
Power Sliding .................107
Removable ...................83
Soft ......................83
Torque Reserve ..................160
Tow Hooks
Emergency ..................281
Towing .................188,190,280
Disabled Vehicle ...............280
Recreational .................193
Weight ....................190
Towing Behind A Motorhome
............193
T
rac-Lok
Rear Axle ...................158
Traction Control ..................230
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............230
Trailer Towing ...................188
Hitches ....................190
Minimum Requirements ............191
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........190,191
Wiring .....................192
Trailer Towing Guide ................190
Trailer Weight ...................190
Trail Recording ..................219
INDEX 359
11
Transfer Case ...................304
Fluid .....................347
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ........155,156
Maintenance .................304
Transmission ...................152
Automatic ................152,305
Fluid .....................347
Maintenance .................305
Manual ....................149
Shifting ....................151
Transporting Pets .................265
Tread Wear Indicators ...............327
Turn Signals .................140,319
U
UCI Connector ...................79
Uconnect Settings .................201
Customer Programmable Features .....42, 201
Passive Entry Programming ...........42
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............332
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ....79
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
If Equipped
................67
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........242
USB........................79
USBPort......................79
V
Vanity Mirrors....................66
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........342
Vehicle Loading ...............187,323
Vehicle Maintenance ...............293
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........9
Vehicle Storage ...............333, 334
Voice Command ..................65
Climate .....................77
Voice Recognition..................65
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...........65
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster De scri ptio ns) . .137
Warnings, Roll Over .................8
Warranty Information ...............350
Warranty Information
.............350
Washers, Windshield ...............292
Washing Vehicle..................335
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............330
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............330
Winch.......................161
Accessories ..................162
Operation ...................162
Rigging Techniques ..............166
Usage .....................161
Wind Buffeting ...................83
Window Fogging ..................77
Window Lockout Switch ...............83
Windows ......................82
Power .....................82
Window Storage ..................91
Windshield
Folding ....................113
Windshield Defroster ...............266
Windshield Washers..............73, 292
Fluid .....................292
Windshield Wiper Blades .............298
Windshield Wipers .................73
Wipers Blade Replacement ............298
Wipers, Rear ....................74
360
INDEX
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can expose
you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
First Edition
24_JL_OM_EN_USC
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada USA
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features,
taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we
know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand
vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
